Mercedes - GLS - Owners Manual - 2021 - 2021

GLS Vehicle document wallet Here you can find comprehen‐ sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form. Digital – on the Internet You can find the Operator's Man‐ ual on the Mercedes-Benz home‐ page. Digital – as an app The Mercedes-Benz Guides app is available free-of-charge in familiar app stores. Apple® iOS É1675841213?ËÍ 1675841213 Order no. P167 0234 13 Part no. 167 584 12 13 Edition A 2021 AndroidTM Mercedes-Benz Digital – in the vehicle Familiarize yourself with the con‐ tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi‐ media system (menu item "Vehi‐ cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips. GLS Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Front passenger airbag warning Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle". Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi‐ cles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Documentation team AG: Not to be reprinted, trans‐ lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes‑Benz AG. ©Mercedes‑Benz Example & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is enabled If the front passenger airbag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, this can result in DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child. Vehicle manufacturer Mercedes‑Benz AG Mercedesstraße 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany As at 24.09.2019 Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Opera‐ tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre‐ gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol‐ lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐ fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐ trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company 1675841213 1675841213 2 Contents Symbols ........................................................ 5 At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps ......................... 10 Overhead control panel ................................ 12 Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 14 Control settings in the rear passenger compartment ................................................ 16 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18 Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 20 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 20 General notes ............................................. Protecting the environment .......................... Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ....................... Operator's Manual ........................................ Service and vehicle operation ....................... Operating safety ........................................... Declaration of conformity for wireless vehicle components ...................................... Diagnostics connection ................................ 22 22 23 23 24 25 27 27 Qualified specialist workshop ....................... Correct use of the vehicle ............................ Sport Utility Vehicle ...................................... Notes for persons with electronic medi‐ cal aids ......................................................... Problems with your vehicle ........................... Reporting safety defects ............................... Limited Warranty .......................................... QR code for rescue card ............................... Data storage ................................................. Copyright ...................................................... Occupant safety ......................................... Restraint system ........................................... Seat belts ..................................................... Airbags ......................................................... PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... Automatic measures after an accident ......... Safely transporting children in the vehi‐ cle ................................................................. Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 28 28 29 29 29 30 31 31 31 34 36 36 38 42 49 51 51 66 Opening and closing .................................. 67 SmartKey ...................................................... 67 Doors ............................................................ Running boards ............................................. Cargo compartment ..................................... Side windows ................................................ Sliding sunroof ............................................. Roller sun blinds ........................................... Anti-theft protection ..................................... 70 74 75 81 84 89 90 Seats and stowing ...................................... 94 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐ tion ............................................................... 94 Seats ............................................................ 94 Steering wheel ............................................ 112 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 114 Operating the memory function .................. 115 Memory function in the rear passenger compartment .............................................. 116 Stowage areas ............................................. 119 Cup holder .................................................. 133 Sockets ....................................................... 135 Refrigerator box .......................................... 137 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .. 139 Installing/removing the floor mats .............. 141 Light and visibility ................................... Exterior lighting .......................................... Interior lighting ........................................... Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ Mirrors ........................................................ Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield .................................................. Infrared-reflective windshield function ........ 143 143 148 150 155 158 158 Climate control ........................................ 159 Overview of climate control systems .......... 159 Operating the climate control system ......... 160 Driving and parking ................................. Driving ........................................................ DYNAMIC SELECT switch ........................... Automatic transmission .............................. Transfer case .............................................. Function of the 4MATIC .............................. Refueling ..................................................... Parking ....................................................... Driving and driving safety systems .............. Trailer hitch ................................................ 168 168 182 185 189 191 191 194 201 269 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 273 Instrument Display and on-board computer .................................................. Notes on the Instrument Display and onboard computer .......................................... Instrument Display overview ....................... Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... Operating the on-board computer ............... Overview of what is shown on the multi‐ function display .......................................... Head-up Display ......................................... MBUX multimedia system ....................... Overview and operation .............................. System settings .......................................... Navigation .................................................. Telephone ................................................... Mercedes me and apps .............................. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ...... Radio & media ............................................. Sound settings ........................................... 274 274 275 276 276 278 278 281 281 289 292 299 302 309 313 320 Contents 3 Maintenance and care ............................. ASSYST PLUS service interval display ......... Engine compartment .................................. Cleaning and care ....................................... 321 321 322 328 Breakdown assistance ............................ Emergency .................................................. Flat tire ....................................................... Battery (vehicle) ......................................... Tow starting or towing away ....................... Electrical fuses ........................................... 336 336 338 343 349 353 Wheels and tires ...................................... Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐ acteristics ................................................... Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ Notes on snow chains ................................ Tire pressure .............................................. Loading the vehicle .................................... Tire labeling ................................................ Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... Changing a wheel ....................................... Emergency spare wheel .............................. 356 356 356 357 357 363 367 372 375 385 4 Contents Collapsible spare wheel .............................. 387 Technical data .......................................... Notes on technical data .............................. Vehicle electronics ..................................... Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................ Operating fluids .......................................... Vehicle data ................................................ Trailer hitch ................................................ 390 390 390 392 394 401 406 Display messages and warning/indi‐ cator lamps .............................................. 408 Display messages ....................................... 408 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 460 Index .......................................................... 474 Symbols In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol‐ lowing symbols: & DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐ ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi‐ ronmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐ ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes. * NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. # Observe notes on material damage. % These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. # Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Information on the multifunction dis‐ Display play/media display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause 5 6 At a glance – Cockpit Left-hand-drive vehicles At a glance – Cockpit 1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles → 187 2 Combination switch → 144 3 Instrument Display → 275 4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 185 5 Media display → 281 6 Climate control systems → 160 7 Hazard warning light system → 145 8 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps → 47 9 Glove box → 122 A Storage compartment → 122 B Controller for volume and switching sound on/off → 281 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off → 281 C Calls up navigation → 283 D Calls up radio or media → 283 E Calls up the telephone → 283 F Control panel for: Individual wheel control (vehicles without offroad package) or → 240 Manual gearshifting → 187 AIRMATIC or → 229 E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL → 236 Activates/deactivates ESP® → 203 Downhill Speed Regulation → 214 G Calls up favorites → 283 H Calls up vehicle functions → 283 I Active Parking Assist → 257 J DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 184 K Touchpad → 283 L Start/stop button → 169 → 180 → 276 ECO start/stop function M Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys‐ tem 7 8 At a glance – Cockpit N Adjusts the steering wheel mechanically → 112 O Adjusts the steering wheel electrically → 113 → 113 Switches the steering wheel heater on/off P Control panel: On-board computer → 276 Cruise control → 213 → 218 Q Diagnostics connection → 27 R Opens the hood → 322 S Electric parking brake → 198 T Light switch → 143 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 10 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps Instrument Display At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps 1 #! Turn signal light → 144 D h Tire pressure monitor → 472 2 6 Restraint system → 462 → 464 3 å ESP® OFF E 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator F Fuel level → 275 G Electric parking brake (red) → 467 → 467 I ü Seat belt → 462 J ; Check Engine → 464 K ä Suspension (red) → 469 → 469 → 470 ESP® → 470 4 R Rear fog lamp → 144 5 K High beam → 144 L Low beam → 143 T Parking lamps → 143 6 ÿ Coolant temperature → 464 7 Coolant temperature display → 275 8 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 467 9 # Electrical malfunction → 464 A L Distance warning → 469 B ! ABS → 470 C Ù Electric power steering → 463 ÷ F USA only ! Canada only H Brakes (red) $ USA only J Canada only ä Suspension (yellow) 11 12 At a glance – Overhead control panel At a glance – Overhead control panel 1 Sun visors 6 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off → 148 7 ; me button → 304 2 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off → 148 3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con‐ trol on/off → 148 8 G SOS button → 304 4 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off → 148 9 3 Opens closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel → 84 5 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 148 3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind → 84 → 156 A Inside rearview mirror 13 14 At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment 1 Opens the door → 70 A Opens/closes the rear right side window → 81 2 Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 71 B Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 65 3 Sets the memory function → 115 C Opens/closes the rear left side window → 81 4 Adjusts the seats electrically → 94 D Opens/closes the left side window → 81 5 Switches the seat heating on/off → 109 E Operates the outside mirrors → 155 6 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 111 F Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support → 98 7 Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driver's seat → 96 G Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 107 8 Opens/closes the tailgate → 75 H Adjusts the head restraints → 103 9 Opens/closes the right side window → 81 15 16 At a glance – Control settings in the rear passenger compartment At a glance – Control settings in the rear passenger compartment 1 Control panel for rear compartment climate control → 160 2 Storage compartment in the center console → 136 3 Adjusts the front passenger seat electrically → 97 4 Switches the rear seat ventilation on/off → 111 5 Switches the rear seat heating on/off → 109 6 Adjusts the rear seats electrically → 98 → 98 115 V socket Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: adjusts a reclin‐ ing rear seat electrically 7 Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: operates the memory function → 116 8 Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: sets the fully reclined position → 99 9 Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: access to the refrigerator box → 137 A Stowage compartment in the rear armrest MBUX rear tablet bracket 17 18 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 1 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 31 2 Safety vests → 336 3 me button and SOS button → 304 4 Hazard warning light system → 145 5 Checking and refilling operating fluids → 394 → 347 6 Tow-starting and towing away → 350 7 Flat tire → 338 Starting assistance 8 Tow-starting and towing away → 350 9 Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tire pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing the rescue card → 191 A Warning triangle → 336 B TIREFIT kit → 339 C First-aid kit (soft sided) → 337 19 20 Digital Operator's Manual Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5 Õ R R R R R R The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Operator's Manual: R Search: search for keywords in order to find quick answers to questions about the opera‐ tion of the vehicle. Quick start: find the first steps towards set‐ ting up your vehicle. Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions. Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the instrument dis‐ play. Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks. Language: select the language for the Digital Operator's Manual. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Back Adds bookmarks Picture Contents section Directions of movement of contents section Menu Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, e.g. warning notes, can be expanded and col‐ lapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator's Manual: Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Operator's Manual by pressing and hold‐ Digital Operator's Manual ing an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system: Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster Voice Control System: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man‐ ual is deactivated while driving. 21 22 General notes Protecting the environment + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi‐ ronment. Please observe the following rec‐ ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor‐ rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them). # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐ ute to environmental protection. # Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐ fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function. # Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible dis‐ posal of the high-voltage battery A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the environment. # Dispose of defective high-voltage bat‐ teries at a qualified specialist work‐ shop. Environmental issues and recommendations: It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regu‐ lations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed. General notes Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components Mercedes-Benz AG offers recycled recondi‐ tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes-Benz AG. R R R R R R R # # # * NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐ ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol‐ lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors Door pillars Door sills Seats Cockpit Instrument cluster Center console Lateral roof frame Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. Have aftermarket installation of acces‐ sories carried out at a qualified special‐ ist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐ vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐ function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels 23 and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine‐ Parts should be used. More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro‐ vide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 392) when ordering MercedesBenz GenuineParts. Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for 24 General notes your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man‐ ual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐ trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi‐ cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi‐ cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author‐ ized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Maintenance Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐ gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" General notes section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu‐ ment wallet. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces‐ sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera‐ ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi‐ cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Possible danger due to substances hazard‐ ous to health In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California: Operating safety & WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐ functions or system failures To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and maintenance work as well any required 25 repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com‐ ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐ tronic component parts or their soft‐ ware. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data". 26 General notes & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system R Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or offroad, regularly check the vehicle under‐ side. # Remove trapped plants or other flam‐ mable material, in particular. # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. R * NOTE Damage to the vehicle In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road The vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot‐ hole A heavy object strikes the underbody or chassis components In situations such as this, the body, the underbody, chassis components, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may not absorb the loads that arise as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam‐ mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts on the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while con‐ tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ tem (EQ Boost technology) & DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ tem contain individual high-voltage compo‐ nents. These high-voltage components are under high voltage. If you modify component parts of these highvoltage components or touch damaged com‐ ponent parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible. # Never perform modifications to compo‐ nent parts of high-voltage components. General notes # # Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components. Never touch component parts of highvoltage components after an accident. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage components. These compo‐ nents are marked with a high voltage label: All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi‐ cle components USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle com‐ ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno‐ vation, Science and Economic Development Can‐ ada’s RSS(s). Operation is subject to the follow‐ ing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi‐ ces (model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface): 27 This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules." The name and address of the responsible party is: peiker acustic GmbH Max-Planck-Str. 28-32 61381 Friedrichsdorf Germany Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐ necting devices to the diagnostics con‐ nection If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. 28 # General notes Only connect the vehicle diagnostics connection to devices which have been tested with regard to their suitability and are considered safe. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. * NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐ nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐ mation being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to cor‐ rectly carry out the work required on your vehi‐ cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. For the following, always have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ ter: R safety-relevant works R service and maintenance work R repair work R modifications as well as installations and conversions R work on electronic components R vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ boost technology): work on high voltage components of the 48 V onboard electrical system Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz service center. Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. General notes Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles If this type of vehicle is not driven safely, an acci‐ dent can occur, the vehicle can roll over and occupants can suffer serious or even fatal inju‐ ries. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi‐ cantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts. manufacturer and your doctor. MercedesBenz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems if there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of aids malfunction‐ ing. Have repairs and maintenance work in the area of vehicle components carrying live voltage and transmission antenna carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. For this reason, the following can occur in isola‐ ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi‐ ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti‐ fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis‐ faction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec‐ essary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Sport Utility Vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident when the center of gravity is too high The vehicle may start to skid and rollover in the event of sudden steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adap‐ ted to the road conditions. # Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle's driving character‐ istics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll‐ over rate than other types of vehicles. 29 Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac‐ turer of the aids; if in doubt, contact the device 30 General notes Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐ eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https:// www.safercar.gov Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans‐ port Canada in addition to notifying MercedesBenz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division tollfree in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels General notes Limited Warranty * NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc‐ tions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐ tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat‐ ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐ cle damage. QR code for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐ tains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Data storage Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi‐ cle. Some of these are necessary for the safe operation of your vehicle, while some assist you when driving (driver assistance systems). In addition, your vehicle provides comfort and entertainment functions, which are also made possible by electronic control units. Electronic control units contain data memories which can temporarily or permanently store technical information about the vehicle's operat‐ ing state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunc‐ tions. 31 In general, this information documents the state of a component part, a module, a system or the surroundings such as: R Operating status of system components (e.g. fill levels, battery status, tire pressure) R Status messages concerning the vehicle or its individual components (e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, longitudinal accel‐ eration, lateral acceleration, display of fas‐ tened seat belts) R Malfunctions or faults in important system components (e.g. lights, brakes) R Information on events leading to vehicle damage R System reactions in special driving situations (e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta‐ bility control systems) R Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain sensor) In addition to providing the actual control unit function, this data assists the manufacturer in detecting and rectifying malfunctions and opti‐ mizing vehicle functions. The majority of this 32 General notes data is temporary and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is stored in the event or fault memory. When your vehicle is serviced, technical data from the vehicle can be read out by service net‐ work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur‐ ers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services). Services include, for example, repair services, maintenance processes, warranty claims and quality assurance measures. The read out is per‐ formed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The respective service network locations or third parties collect, process and use the data. They document technical statuses of the vehicle, assist in finding faults and improving quality and are transmitted to the manufacturer, if neces‐ sary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this, the manufacturer requires technical data from vehicles. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet as part of repair or maintenance work. Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle convenience and info‐ tainment functions yourself. This includes, for example: R Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐ grated navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or it is located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player). If this data is stored in the vehicle, you can delete it at any time. This data is sent to third parties only at your request, par‐ ticularly when you use online services in accord‐ ance with the settings that you have selected. You can store or change convenience settings/ individualization in the vehicle at any time. Depending on the equipment, this includes, for example: R Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐ tions R Suspension and climate control settings R Customizations such as interior lighting If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can control this by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Cer‐ tain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integration, this can include: R General vehicle data R Position data This allows you to use selected apps on your smartphone, such as navigation or music play‐ back. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehi‐ cle data is not directly accessible. Which type of General notes further data processing occurs is determined by the provider of the specific app used. Which set‐ tings you can make, if any, depends on the spe‐ cific app and the operating system of your smartphone. Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐ tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐ less network connection is enabled via the vehi‐ cle's transmission and reception unit or via con‐ nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones). Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online serv‐ ices and applications/apps provided by the man‐ ufacturer or other providers. Manufacturer's services Regarding online services of the manufacturer, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Operator's Manual, website of the manufacturer) along with the relevant data protection information. Per‐ sonal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Personal data is collected, pro‐ cessed and used via the provision of services exclusively on the basis of legal permissions or with prior consent. The services and functions (sometimes subject to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated. In some cases, this also applies to the entire vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par‐ ticular, legally prescribed functions and services. Third party services If it is possible to use online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. The manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, please ask the service provider for information about the type, extent and pur‐ pose of the collection and use of personal data when services are provided by third parties. 33 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi‐ media system or Mercedes me connect, addi‐ tional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca‐ tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con‐ nect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit‐ uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to 34 General notes vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were operating R Whether or not the driver and front passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understand‐ ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat‐ ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci‐ dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with‐ out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les‐ see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐ ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys‐ tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Copyright Free and open source software Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource General notes Registered trademarks R Bluetooth® R R R R R R R R R is a registered trademark of Blue‐ tooth SIG, Inc. DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. BabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg‐ istered trademarks of Mercedes-Benz AG. HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gen‐ tex Corporation. iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis‐ tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq‐ uity Digital Corporation. R R Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. ZAGATSurvey® and related brands are regis‐ tered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. 35 36 Occupant safety Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system The restraint system includes the following com‐ ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems The restraint system can help prevent the vehi‐ cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐ tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐ ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro‐ tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐ pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ sible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. However, no system available today can com‐ pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. Reduced restraint system protection & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec‐ ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐ modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). Restraint system functionality When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys‐ Occupant safety tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐ tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ tions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. Function of the restraint system in an acci‐ dent How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli‐ sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci‐ sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐ out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if 37 only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel‐ eration. Depending on the detected deployment situa‐ tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron‐ tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact R Cushionbag: frontal impact R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact 38 Occupant safety The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 47). & WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐ ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐ gered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐ gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear‐ ing. R In general, the powder released is not haz‐ ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro‐ tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlo‐ rate, for example. Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐ not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐ pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the instructions about the cor‐ rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 94). Occupant safety In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐ vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐ cle occupant must observe the following infor‐ mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the cen‐ ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐ der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐ ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐ dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 119). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 56). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 52). 39 Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before com‐ mencing your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. 40 # Occupant safety Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys‐ tem. & WARNING Danger of injury or death due to blocked seat belt anchorage The restraint effect of the seat belt is impaired if objects between the front seat and the door are blocking the movable seat belt anchorage on the front seat. # Before starting a journey, make sure that there are no objects between the front seat and the door. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐ fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R R The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Modifications have been made to the Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may be deployed unintentionally or not function as intended. # Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt ancho‐ rages or seat belt retractors. # Make sure that the seat belts are not damaged, are not worn and are clean. # Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten‐ sioning Devices Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera‐ tional and are unable to perform their inten‐ ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi‐ ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. Occupant safety Fastening and adjusting the seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐ not be pulled out any further. # # Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired position. Let go of the seat belt outlet release and ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into position. * NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device and side air bag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device and the side air bag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. # Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐ responding seat. Seat belt adjustment function Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: If the front seat belt is not pulled tightly across your body, the seat belt adjustment may automatically apply a cer‐ 41 tain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys‐ tem (/ page 41). Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt Adjustment. Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the instru‐ ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐ pants must wear their seat belts correctly. 42 Occupant safety The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Airbags Overview of airbags Potential protection provided by each airbag: Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage R Window curtain airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis R & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is enabled 1 2 3 4 5 Driver's knee airbag Driver's airbag Front passenger airbag Window curtain airbag Side airbag The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. If the front passenger airbag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, this can result in DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 62). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Occupant safety Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 47). * NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. # # Stow objects in a suitable place. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Depending on the detected accident situation, the window curtain airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied. Information on the cushionbag in the reclin‐ ing rear seat The cushionbag offers additional occupant pro‐ tection in the event of frontal impacts. When activated, the cushionbag deploys under the seat cushion. This helps prevent the vehicle occupant from slipping off the seat cushion. If you install a child restraint system on the reclining rear seat, always observe the additional notes (/ page 52). Protection provided by the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection provided by a correctly fastened seat belt. 43 & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐ tective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front 44 R R R R R Occupant safety passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa‐ tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 94). Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐ ment area of the airbag. If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 52). Always stow and secure objects correctly. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow‐ ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air‐ bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side wall trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy‐ ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Limited protection provided by airbags & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐ cations to the cover of an airbag If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and do not affix objects to it. The installation location of an airbag is identified by the airbag symbol (/ page 42). & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten‐ ded. Occupant safety In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the correspond‐ ing seats by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ tioning sensors in the door The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per‐ formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. # Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro‐ tection. # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. R R Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. R Status of the front passenger front airbag Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐ tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always make sure of the following: R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐ tioned correctly (/ page 51). R Always comply with the child restraint sys‐ tem manufacturer's installation instructions. R Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. R 45 Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐ ment. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐ tion and the head restraint setting accord‐ ingly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func‐ tion of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. 46 # # # # Occupant safety Do not place any objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi‐ ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 38). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ sible. The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow‐ ing situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the sitting sur‐ face. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the R R # front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. The person is seated correctly. Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas‐ sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 47). Occupant safety Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐ tor lamps Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. The status of the front passenger airbag is dis‐ played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after approx‐ imately 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa‐ bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag 47 shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta‐ tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐ tinuously. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. 48 Occupant safety Always ensure that the front passenger air‐ bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 62). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forwardfacing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with the vehicle inte‐ rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ cator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. # Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet # and the front passenger seat accord‐ ingly. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 62). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐ tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature correspond‐ ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person Occupant safety R with a build corresponding to that of an adult should not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up continuously or remains off, depending on the classifica‐ tion. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per‐ son of smaller stature should use a rear seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor‐ rectly fastened seat belt. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Securing the child restraint system on the front passenger seat (/ page 62) 49 PRE-SAFE® system PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protec‐ tion) PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv‐ ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐ ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas‐ ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: Move the front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. R Vehicles with memory function in the rear passenger compartment: move the outer rear seats to a more favorable seat position. 50 R R Occupant safety Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increase the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi‐ media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐ tective mechanism of a person's hearing. * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐ tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place. Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your‐ self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is can‐ celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol‐ lowing situations: R when backing up or R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact The system will not initiate any braking applica‐ tion in the following situations: R whilst driving or R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side If an imminent side impact is detected, PRESAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases Occupant safety the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual display message appears (/ page 409). Automatic measures after an accident Depending on the type and severity of the acci‐ dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R Automatic braking (post-collision brake) R Activating the hazard warning lights R Triggering an automatic emergency call (/ page 310) R Switching off the engine To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition off and switch it back on (/ page 169). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, it is possible that the vehicle can no longer be started. R R R R R Switching off the fuel supply Unlocking the vehicle doors Lowering the side windows Displaying the emergency guide in the multi‐ media system display Switching on the interior lighting Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the postcollision brake can minimize the severity of a fur‐ ther collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by tak‐ ing the following actions: R Braking more strongly than automatic brak‐ ing R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force 51 Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog‐ nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil‐ dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 52). Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing the child in the child restraint system may have seri‐ ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur‐ ing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than twelve years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi‐ cle. R The child restraint system must be appropri‐ ate to the age, weight and size of the child. 52 R Occupant safety The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal‐ ling a child restraint system. Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil‐ dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys‐ tem is, for example: R a baby car seat R a rearward-facing child seat R a forward-facing child seat R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Observe standards for child restraint sys‐ tems All child restraint systems must meet the follow‐ ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal‐ lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Detecting risks, avoiding danger Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets R the vehicle's seat belt system R the Top Tether anchorages Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint sys‐ tem (/ page 57). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a Occupant safety height where a three-point seat belt can be fas‐ tened properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide. Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo‐ site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐ vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Always secure a child restraint system cor‐ rectly & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur‐ er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. # Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys‐ tem. # Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. # Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers. 53 & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 57). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 61). 54 Occupant safety Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 63). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 62). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour‐ ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur‐ rent situation (/ page 47). Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Also secure Top Tether if present. - R R Do not alter the child restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐ cations to the child restraint system The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐ tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been dam‐ aged or involved in an accident. # Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again. Avoid direct sunlight & WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example. # If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Occupant safety Observe when stopping or parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil‐ dren. & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people – particularly children – are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injury. # Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐ dren – unattended in the vehicle. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐ tended. 55 Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system Left/right rear seat Second row of seats, preferred securing system: ® LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 60) Third row of seats, preferred securing system: ® LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 60) Left/right rear seat (second and third seat row) – alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt 56 Occupant safety Be sure to observe: If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 47). R Observe the notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 45) R Center rear seat Center rear seat (second seat row) – securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 60) Activating or deactivating the child seat safety feature of the seat belt & WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the child safety lock is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is retracted slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately fastened again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord‐ ance with the traffic conditions. # Activate the special seat belt retractor again and correctly secure the child restraint system. When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a child seat safety feature: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats # # # # # # To install a child restraint system: when installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the informa‐ tion in this Operator's Manual. Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet. Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle. To activate the child seat safety feature: pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the child seat safety feature is activa‐ ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound. Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly. To deactivate the child seat safety fea‐ ture: press the release button of the seat belt buckle. Occupant safety # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet. Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back‐ rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster (fold rear seat back electrically) or the red lock verification indi‐ cator will be visible (fold rear seat back mechani‐ cally). & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is exceeded Too much load may be placed on the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child seat securing systems and the child may not be restrained in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys‐ tem together weigh more than the per‐ missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg), use only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system that secures the child with the vehicle seat belt. # 57 Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R in the manufacturer's installation and operat‐ ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. 58 Occupant safety O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. ® When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the follow‐ ing: O When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat and a Group I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a Group I forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐ ble. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi‐ ately and adjust all head restraints cor‐ rectly. O When using a child restraint system on a seat on the third row of seats: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system and move the seat backrest of the front seat into an upright position if necessary. O For certain child restraint systems in weight group II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐ ble contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be installed between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints accordingly. # * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ ped. Vehicles with individual rear seats: Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged in both mounting brackets in the vehicle. 1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket Occupant safety # # # Remove and store away covers 1 of the mounting brackets in the vehicle. Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle. After removing the child restraint system, reattach covers 1. Vehicles with a rear bench seat: # # # # # # Mercedes-Maybach vehicles with reclin‐ ing rear seats: Before a LATCH-type (ISO‐ FIX) or i-Size child restraint system is instal‐ led, tilt the reclining rear seat backrest back slightly. Remove upholstered lining 1. Vehicles without reclining rear seats: Fold upholstered lining 1 upwards. Turn the support on the back of upholstered lining 1 by 90°. Upholstered lining 1 will remain folded upwards. Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets 2 in the vehicle. Mercedes-Maybach vehicles with reclin‐ ing rear seats: Return the reclining rear seat backrest to an upright position. The reclining rear seat backrest must be in contact with the child restraint system. 59 Vehicles with a third row of seats: # Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets 1. 60 Occupant safety Securing a Top Tether & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after installing Top Tether belts The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when driving. In this case, child restraint systems may no longer perform their intended protective function. Additional injuries may also be caused. # Always lock rear seat backrests after installing Top Tether belts. # Pay attention to the lock verification indicator. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster (fold rear seat back electrically) or the red lock verification indi‐ cator will be visible (fold rear seat back mechani‐ cally). ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury can be reduced by a Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCHtype (ISOFIX) and the vehicle. The Top Tether anchorages for the second row of seats are located on the back of the seat back‐ rest. For the third row of seats, use the Top Tether anchorage on the back of the seat back‐ rest. Second row of seats Occupant safety # # # # # # # If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 105). Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instal‐ lation instructions. Guide Top Tether belt 5 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars. If cargo compartment cover 3 is installed, guide Top Tether belt 5 downwards between cargo compartment cover 3 and seat backrest 2. Hook Top Tether hook 6 of Top Tether belt 5 into Top Tether anchorage 4 without twisting. Tension Top Tether belt 5. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instal‐ lation instructions. If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down‐ wards (/ page 105). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 5. Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back‐ rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R R # 61 As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest. Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster (fold rear seat back electrically) or the red lock verification indi‐ cator will be visible (fold rear seat back mechani‐ cally). When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. 62 Occupant safety O When using a category 0/0+ baby car seat and a category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a category I forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐ ble. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi‐ ately and adjust all head restraints cor‐ rectly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐ wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐ let. wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints accordingly. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats & WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 56). # Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat. # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air‐ bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. Occupant safety NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the specific instructions for rearwardfacing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 63). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica‐ tor lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 47). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena‐ bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the child restraint system manufac‐ turer's installation and operating instruc‐ tions. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐ ble. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi‐ ately and adjust all head restraints cor‐ rectly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. 63 O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints accordingly. O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a child seat safety feature. When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 56). # Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible. # Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐ ment. # Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. 64 # # # # Occupant safety Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible. Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐ wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐ let. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. Child safety locks # Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil‐ dren. & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people – particularly children – are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injury. # Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐ dren – unattended in the vehicle. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐ tended. Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. 65 Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users R Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example # # # Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. # # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate). Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly. # To activate/deactivate: press button 2. The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases: R indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door 66 Occupant safety R Indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door. Notes on pets in the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat‐ tended in the vehicle If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐ ded or unsecured, they could possibly press down buttons or switches. Thereby an animal may: R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example R switch systems on or off and endanger other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuver and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐ tended. Always correctly secure animals while driving, for example using a suitable animal carrier. Opening and closing SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil‐ dren. * NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields # Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp 67 3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the tailgate 5 Panic alarm % If indicator lamp 2 does not light up after pressing the Ü or ß button, the bat‐ tery is discharged. Replacing the SmartKey battery (/ page 69). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R the doors R the fuel filler flap R the tailgate If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Antitheft protection is armed again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec‐ tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey's functionality. Do not keep the SmartKey in the temperaturecontrolled cup holder. Otherwise, the SmartKey will not be reliably detected. 68 Opening and closing Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock. Activating/deactivating the panic alarm Requirements: R The ignition is switched off. # or # To activate: press button 1 for approx‐ imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered. Press the start/stop button on the cockpit (the SmartKey is inside the vehicle). Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap R To switch between settings: press the Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice. Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked. # # To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again. Deactivating the SmartKey functions If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective SmartKey. To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions. # To deactivate: press the ß button on the SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once. # To activate: press any button on the Smart‐ Key. % When the vehicle is started with the Smart‐ Key in the marked space of the center con‐ sole, the SmartKey functions are automati‐ cally activated (/ page 169). Opening and closing Removing/inserting the emergency key Replacing the SmartKey battery & DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries To remove: press release knob 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly. # Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position. # Press release knob 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2. # To insert: press release knob 1. # Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate position or fully until it engages. % You can use the intermediate position of emergency key 2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring. # Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐ stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐ dren. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by improper disposal of batteries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. 69 # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐ shop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 69). 70 Opening and closing Problems with the SmartKey You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R The SmartKey is faulty. # # # # # # # Press release knob 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow. Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove. Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery. Insert the new battery into battery compart‐ ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat‐ tery when doing this. Push in battery compartment 3. Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it engages. # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 69). Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 69). Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The SmartKey function is impaired by, for exam‐ ple: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, Tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or auto‐ matic barriers # Make sure that there is a sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well. Doors Unlocking and opening doors from the inside Opening and closing # # # Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐ LESS-GO To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle 2. Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked. To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle. The locking pin pops up when the rear door is unlocked. To open a rear door: pull the rear door han‐ dle again. Requirements: R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door at which the door handle is used are closed. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: the buttons are also located in the rear doors. 71 # # To unlock: press button 1. To lock: press button 2. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the SmartKey. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐ LESS-GO. 72 Opening and closing To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐ face of the door handle. # To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2. # Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐ sor surface 2 until the closing process has been completed. % Further information on convenience closing (/ page 83). If you open the tailgate from outside, it is auto‐ matically unlocked. # Problems with KEYLESS-GO You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. Possible causes: R The SmartKey functions have been deactiva‐ ted (/ page 68). R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R The SmartKey is faulty. # # # # Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 68). Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 69). Use the emergency key to unlock or lock the vehicle (/ page 69). Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Activating/deactivating the automatic lock‐ ing feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐ ing faster than walking pace. There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The KEYLESS-GO function is impaired by, for example: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or auto‐ matic barriers # Make sure that there is a sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. # To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. Opening and closing To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R While the vehicle is being tow started/ pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna‐ mometer. # Power closing function 73 If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock. Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐ er's door using the emergency key. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. # Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area. # Automatic closing of the doors can be canceled by pulling the outer or inner door handle. # # # # Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening 1 in the cover. Pull and hold the door handle. Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. Release the door handle. 74 Opening and closing Running boards Operation of the running boards # # # To unlock: turn the emergency key counterclockwise to position 1. To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1. Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐ der until it engages and is seated firmly. Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: the vehicle is equipped with electrically extendable running boards. If you have selected the automatic mode in the multimedia system, (/ page 75) the running board will extend automatically on the respective side when a door is opened. You can use manual mode to clean the running boards (/ page 332). % The running boards will extend and retract only if the vehicle is stationary. In the following cases, the running boards will retract automatically: R If you select an off-road drive program (/ page 182). R If you activate car wash mode (/ page 330). R If the outside mirrors fold in automatically (/ page 157). R If you are driving at a speed greater than 2.5 mph (4 km/h). If you have selected the automatic mode in the multimedia system and you manually extend the running boards when the doors are closed, the running boards will remain extended, even if you open a door and then close it again. Automatic mode will be reactivated only when you are driv‐ ing at a speed greater than 2.5 mph (4 km/h). * NOTE Damage to the running boards during extension or retraction The running boards extend at the side during extension. During retraction, the running boards are integrated in the side skirt. # Make sure that there is sufficient space during extension and retraction. Read the display message that may be displayed in the instrument cluster (/ page 408). Opening and closing Extending and retracting the running boards via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 SIDE RUNNING BOARD # Select Extend or Retract. Automatically extending and retracting the running boards # Activate or deactivate AUTOMATIC EXTENSION. % This equipment is available only for Mercedes-Maybach vehicles. Cargo compartment Opening the tailgate gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. * NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Make sure that there is sufficient space behind and above the tailgate. # # & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐ 75 # Pull remote operating switch 1 for the tail‐ gate. Press and hold the p button on the SmartKey. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Use your foot to kick below the bumper (/ page 78). 76 # # Opening and closing If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate handle and release it. For a tailgate stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards and release it as soon as it starts to open. The tailgate is equipped with an automatic object recognition function. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate during automatic opening, this process will be stopped. The auto‐ matic object recognition function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when you are opening the tailgate. Closing the tailgate & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. # Pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate Body parts may become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press the p button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle. # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper. Opening and closing # 77 Press and hold the p button on the SmartKey (with the SmartKey in the vicinity of the vehicle). Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS # Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 78). # # Switch on the power supply or the ignition. Press remote operating switch 1 for the tailgate. # Press closing button 1 on the tailgate. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button 2 on the tailgate. If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be locked. Automatic reversing function for the tailgate The tailgate is equipped with automatic object recognition with a reversing function. If a solid object hinders or restricts the tailgate when it is closing automatically, the tailgate will automati‐ cally open again slightly. Automatic object recog‐ nition with reversing function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when you are closing the tailgate. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function will not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers 78 R Opening and closing Towards the end of the closing procedure HANDS-FREE ACCESS function In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap‐ ped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, either: R Press the p button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 75) and closing (/ page 76) the tailgate. % Two warning tones sound when the tailgate is opening or closing. & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors. With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. * NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten‐ tional opening of the tailgate R R # when using an automatic car wash when using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure that the key located is at least 10 ft Opening and closing (3 m) away from the vehicle in such sit‐ uations. When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the vehicle while performing the kicking move‐ ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again. 1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros‐ thetic leg. 79 The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in the following situations: R If a person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R If objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R If clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are pulled over the bumper. R If a protective mat with a length reaching over the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R If the protective mat is not secured correctly. R When working on the trailer hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks. Deactivate the SmartKey functions (/ page 68) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations. 80 Opening and closing Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate Activating the opening angle limiter You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range to approx‐ imately 8 in (20 cm) before the end position. # Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at the desired position. # Press and hold the closing button on the tail‐ gate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in the stored posi‐ tion when opened. To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically. Deactivating the opening angle limiter # Press and hold the closing button on the tail‐ gate until two short acoustic signals sound. Releasing the tailgate in an emergency Requirements: R Only for Mercedes-Maybach vehicles. # Remove cover 1. # Pull lever 2 in the direction of the arrow until the tailgate unlocks. Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key Requirements: R Not for Mercedes-Maybach vehicles. Opening and closing R R The rear seat backrest has been folded forward. The cargo compartment cover has been removed. Side windows Opening and closing the side windows & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but‐ ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window # Insert emergency key 2 into opening 1 in the trim and push it in. The tailgate will be unlocked. When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # 81 If someone is trapped, release the but‐ ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they oper‐ ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐ tended. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side win‐ dows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched on. 82 Opening and closing # To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again. When the vehicle is switched off, the side win‐ dows can continue being operated. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened. % Vehicles with electric roller sunblinds on rear doors on the left and right: The but‐ tons for the rear side windows also open and close the roller sunblinds (/ page 89). 1 Closes 2 Opens The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐ dence. # To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. Automatic reversing function of the side win‐ dows If an object impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ gers. R During resetting. The reversing function cannot prevent some‐ one from becoming trapped in these situa‐ tions. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Opening and closing Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey) & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. # Press and hold the Ü button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The sliding sunroof is opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. % If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first. % If the roller sunblinds of the rear doors are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. # To interrupt convenience opening: release the Ü button. # To continue convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again. Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside) & WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win‐ dow and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing 83 process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # Press and hold the ß button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The sliding sunroof is closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed. # To interrupt convenience closing: release the ß button. # To close the roller sunblinds: press and hold the ß button again. % Convenience closing can also be operated with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 71). # 84 Opening and closing Problems with the side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window. A side window cannot be closed and you can‐ not see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide. # Adjust the side windows. Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull the correspond‐ ing button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull the correspond‐ ing button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea‐ ture. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 69). Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During opening and closing, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped. Opening and closing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by chil‐ dren Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sun‐ blind's range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped. * NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice. * NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐ roof may damage the sealing strips. # Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. 85 * NOTE Important points to remember when a roof luggage rack is installed When a roof luggage rack is installed, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be limi‐ ted. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof lug‐ gage rack is installed. # If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof. 86 Opening and closing 1 To raise 2 To open 3 To close/lower Use the 3 button to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. % The roller sunblind can be opened only when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed or in the raised position. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is installed. # To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. # To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stop‐ ped. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The automatic raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed or raised. Vehicles without a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The automatic open‐ ing and raising features are available only when the sliding sunroof is closed. # To ventilate the vehicle interior: raise the sliding sunroof. The roller sunblind will open slightly. Operating the roller sunblind for the sliding sunroof from the rear passenger compart‐ ment Opening and closing To open: press button 1. To close: pull button 1. % When the sliding sunroof is open, it will close first. To close the roller sunblind, you must pull button 1 again. If you push or pull button 1 beyond the point of resistance, you will start automatic operation in the direction in question. You can stop auto‐ matic operation by pressing or pulling the button again. # # Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an object is obstructing the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐ stitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active In particular, the reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ gers. R Towards the end of the closing proce‐ dure. R During resetting. # # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped. 87 Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an object is obstructing the roller sunblind dur‐ ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic revers‐ ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of move‐ ment. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ gers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or 88 # Opening and closing Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing function when driving" and "Automatic lower‐ ing". Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion. # If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for‐ wards or backwards. Problems with the sliding sunroof & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again If the sliding sunroof is closed again immedi‐ ately after it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped. The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly: Opening and closing Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed with even greater force. Vehicles without a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The sliding sunroof is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof. # Resetting the sliding sunroof # Push the 3 button up to the point of resistance repeatedly until the sliding sun‐ roof is fully open. # Press the 3 button for another second. # Close the sliding sunroof. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun‐ blind. Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. # # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed. Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. Roller sun blinds Extending or retracting the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind Body parts could become trapped in the sweep of the roller sunblind when it is being extended or retracted. # Make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind when it is being extended or retracted. # If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button in the opposite direc‐ tion. The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position. * NOTE Damage caused by objects Objects could cause malfunctions of the roller sunblind. # Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. The roller sunblinds for the rear side windows can be operated with the buttons for the side windows in the driver's door and in the rear doors. 89 90 Opening and closing Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer 1 Rear left side window/roller sunblind 2 Rear right side window/roller sunblind # # To close fully: briefly pull the corresponding button when the side window is closed. To open fully: briefly press the correspond‐ ing button. The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart‐ Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R when a door is opened R when the tailgate is opened R when the hood is opened R when interior protection is triggered (/ page 92) R when the tow-away alarm is triggered (/ page 91) The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa‐ tions: R after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Opening and closing R after pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment (/ page 169) % When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐ matically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 310). % In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-theft alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start. Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO Deactivating the ATA # Press the Ü, ß or p button on the SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button with the Smart‐ Key in the marked space (/ page 169) Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO Grasp the outside door handle with the SmartKey outside the vehicle. # 91 Function of the tow-away alarm % This function may not be available in all countries. An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after approximately 60 seconds: R after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol‐ lowing components are closed: R the doors R the tailgate The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva‐ ted: R after pressing the Ü or p button on the SmartKey R after pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment (/ page 169) 92 R R Opening and closing after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 200). Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow‐ ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to arm or disarm the tow-away alarm. Function of the interior motion sensor % This function may not be available in all countries. When the interior motion sensor is activated, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if move‐ ment is detected in the vehicle interior. The interior motion sensor is activated automati‐ cally after approximately ten seconds: R after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R the doors R the tailgate The interior motion sensor is automatically deac‐ tivated: R after pressing the Ü or p button on the SmartKey R after pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 169) R R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R moving objects such as mascots in the vehi‐ cle interior R when the side window is open R when the sliding sunroof is open R when the panoramic sliding sunroof is open Arming/deactivating the interior motion sen‐ sor Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sensor. The interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. Opening and closing R The vehicle is locked again. % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to activate or deactivate the interior motion sensor. 93 94 Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position R & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi‐ cle is in motion R R You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas‐ ten your seat belt. R R R R Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration. R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly The back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent You can move your legs freely You can see all the displays on the instru‐ ment cluster clearly You have a good overview of the traffic con‐ ditions Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the center of your shoul‐ der and across your hips in the pelvic area Seats Adjusting the front seat & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. Seats and stowing # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. You can adjust the seats when the ignition is switched off. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐ dren in the vehicle". & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi‐ cle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas‐ ten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. 95 Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. 96 Seats and stowing Adjusting the front passenger seat electri‐ cally from the driver's seat Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before com‐ mencing your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Head restraint height Seat backrest inclination Seat height Seat cushion length Seat cushion inclination Seat fore-and-aft position # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 115). You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat: R Seat adjustment Seats and stowing R R R # # # Seat heating Seat ventilation Memory function Adjusting the front passenger seat electri‐ cally from the rear passenger compartment To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the driver's side door control panel. Select the driver's seat: press button 1 again. When the indicator lamp goes out, the driv‐ er's seat has been selected. # # To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door control panel in the rear passenger compartment (/ page 98). 97 % Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: if the front passenger seat is in the foremost position, you can set the seat backrest at a very steep angle. This will provide a better forward view from the rear passenger compartment. Despite the steep angle of the seat backrest, a person may occupy the front passenger seat. 98 Seats and stowing Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Adjusting the rear seats electrically The middle seat backrest is adjusted together with the left seat. # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 116). Adjusting the reclining rear seats electrically The reclining rear seats are on the driver's and front passenger sides. 1 2 3 4 Higher Softer Lower Firmer # Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your back. 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat backrest inclination 3 Seat fore-and-aft position 1 Head restraint height 2 Head restraint fore-and-aft position Seats and stowing 3 Seat backrest inclination 4 Combined seat cushion inclination and R length R 5 Combined seat cushion inclination and length The front passenger seat head restraint will be completely retracted. The front passenger seat backrest will move as far forwards and as far down as it will go. 6 Fore-and-aft position of the leg rest 7 Angle of the leg rest Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 116). % The leg rest folds down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it. # Setting the fully reclined position Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. # To set the fully reclined position: press button 1. R The rear seat will move into the fully reclined position. R The rear seat head restraint will move. R The leg rest will rise. R The front passenger seat will move as far forwards as possible. # or 99 To restore the standard seat settings: press button 1. 100 Seats and stowing Folding the rear seats on the second row of seats forwards and back electrically Calling up the settings with the memory function (/ page 116). % You can use the rear passenger compart‐ ment child safety lock to disable this func‐ tion (/ page 65). % The leg rest folds down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it. # & WARNING Risk of injury due to seat backrest folded forwards Attaching and removing the additional cush‐ ion of the leg rest Use the additional cushion only when the vehicle is stationary. The additional cushion is in the vehicle. # # # To attach: place the additional cushion on the leg rest. Pull the rubber straps laterally over the leg rest. To remove: remove the rubber straps from the leg rest and stow the additional cushion safely in the vehicle. If the rear seat backrest is folded forwards, persons in the third row of seats could col‐ lide with parts of the seat adjustment mech‐ anism, in particular in the event of an acci‐ dent, sudden braking or an abrupt change of direction. # If there is a person in the third row of seats, the rear seat in front of that per‐ son must be folded back into the driv‐ ing position before starting the journey. # People in the third row of seats must not place their legs on a rear seat back‐ rest that has been folded forwards. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Seats and stowing 101 If you no longer require the seat backrest to be folded down for loading or for getting in and out, fold it back into place. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is not engaged The seat does not engage when folded for‐ wards. The seat can fold backwards unex‐ pectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in the event of an abrupt change of direction or an accident. People in the seat's sweep can become trap‐ ped. # If a seat is folded forwards, always fold it back before driving off. # Make sure that the seat is engaged. If a seat on the second row of seats is not engaged, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. Requirements: R The area into which the rear seat is folded is clear. R The rear seat has been folded up. R R R R Vehicles with comfort seating: the center armrest is folded up. Vehicles with an extended center console: the storage compartment in the center con‐ sole is closed. Vehicles with a folding rear armrest: the rear armrest has been folded up. Vehicles with center seat backrests: the cen‐ ter seat backrest has been folded up. R Seven-seater with center seat backrest: both sides % To increase the size of the cargo compart‐ ment, you can move the seat backrests into the cargo compartment floor position (/ page 124). Folding the rear seat in the front position You can fold the seats on the second row of seats forwards for the following situations: R For easier access to the cargo compartment R Vehicles with a third row of seats: for getting in or out Vehicles with a center seat backrest: the center rear seat folds forwards and backwards, together with the left rear seat. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can fold the rear seats forwards as follows: R Six-seater: on the right-hand side of the vehi‐ cle only Button on the backrest shoulder of the second row of seats 102 Seats and stowing # When the rear door is closed: pull and hold button 1 on the backrest shoulder of the rear seat. or Press and hold button 2 on the armrest of the third row of seats. The head restraint moves downwards. The seat backrest moves into the front position. The rear seat moves forwards until it unlocks. The rear seat then tips forwards. If a seat on the second row of seats is not engaged, this will be shown on the multifunc‐ tion display on the instrument cluster. % You can prevent the rear seats from folding forwards when the rear door is closed by activating the child safety lock for the back windows (/ page 65). # Button on the armrest of the third row of seats (seven-seater) # When the rear door is open: briefly pull but‐ ton 1 on the backrest shoulder of the rear seat. or # Briefly press button 2 on the armrest of the third row of seats. Folding back the rear seat Press and hold button 1 on the backrest shoulder of the rear seat or 2 on the arm‐ # # rest of the third row of seats and hold it down until the rear seat audibly engages. The rear seat tips downwards and move back. The seat backrests and head restraint will then move into a suitable seat position automatically. If a seat on the second row of seats is not engaged, this will be shown on the multifunc‐ tion display on the instrument cluster. To interrupt the folding procedure before engagement, let go of button 1. To continue the folding procedure, press and hold button 1 again. Folding the rear seats forwards mechanically (emergency release) You can also fold the rear seats forwards mechanically using release loops. The release loops are located on the outer sides and backs of the seats on the second row of seats. Seats and stowing 103 # # # Pull one of the release loops 1. Fold the seat backrest forwards. Before you start the journey, make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat are engaged. Head restraints Release loops on the second row of seats Release loops on the backs of the second row of seats Adjusting the front seat head restraints man‐ ually & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi‐ cle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas‐ ten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. 104 Seats and stowing Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. # # To move forward: press release knob 2 and pull the head restraint forward. To move backwards: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint backwards. Adjusting the EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints on the front seats mechanically Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints mechanically # # # To raise: pull the head restraint up. To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐ tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down. # To move forward: press release knob 1 and pull the head restraint forward. To move backwards: press release knob 1 and push the head restraint backwards. # # To move forward: press release knob 1 and pull the head restraint forward. To move backwards: press release knob 1 and push the head restraint backwards. Seats and stowing 105 To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: pull or push right or left-hand side bolster 2. % The fore-and-aft position of the head restraint will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the backrest using the buttons on the door control panel. Vehicles with a third row of seats The head restraints on the third row of seats have a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the extended, top position in which the head restraint engages; the nonusage position is the bottom, retracted position of the head restraint. If the seats on the third row of seats are being used, the head restraint must be in the top, engaged usage position. # If the third row of seats is occupied: move the head restraints to the very top and have them engage there. # If the third row of seats is not occupied: move the head restraints to the very bottom. # Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can mechanically adjust the head restraints on the third row of seats as well as the center head restraint on the second row of seats. Head restraint of the standard vehicle (example) # # # To raise: pull the head restraint up. To lower (standard vehicle): press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down. To lower (Mercedes-Maybach vehicles): push the head restraint down. 106 Seats and stowing Installing/removing the head restraint of the middle rear seat on the second row Removing # Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint. Installing Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. # Push the head restraint down until it engages. # Fold the middle rear seat backrest back until it engages. # Adjusting the luxury head restraints of the rear seats mechanically Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: you can set only the side bolsters mechanically. You can adjust the angle of the head restraint electrically. # # Release the middle rear seat backrest and fold it forward slightly (/ page 124). Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go. Head restraint of the standard vehicle (example) # # To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: pull or push right or left-hand side bolster 1. To adjust the angle of the head restraint: pull or push the head restraint in the direc‐ tion of arrow 2. Attaching and removing the additional cush‐ ion of the luxury head restraint in the rear compartment Use the additional cushion only when the vehicle is stationary. The additional cushion is in the vehicle. Seats and stowing 107 Configuring the seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settings Z for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions. Adjusting the backrest side bolsters Select Side Bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat. # # # # Position the head restraint as far forwards as possible. To attach the additional cushion: hold additional cushion 1 against the head restraint and push press studs 2 into the counterpieces. To remove the additional cushion: release press studs 2 and remove additional cush‐ ion 1. Setting the seat heating balance Select Seat Heating Balance. # Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat. # Setting automatic seat adjustment & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the profile. You or other vehicle occu‐ pants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move‐ ment. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐ ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐ ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the media display. or 108 Seats and stowing # b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. Requirements: R Adapting the driver's seat and steering wheel position to the body size: automatic seat adjustment has been switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment Switching automatic seat adjustment on/off When the active user profile is changed while the vehicle is stationary, the driver's seat, steer‐ ing wheel, outside mirrors and seat contour will automatically be adapted to the driver. # Select On or Off. % This setting is available only for individual user profiles. For the guest profile, auto‐ matic seat adjustment cannot be switched on or off. Further information about user profiles . Adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly. # To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in. # Set the size using the scale. # Select Start Positioning. The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set. % If the driver's seat and steering wheel posi‐ tion calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually changed at any time via the buttons. The exterior mirrors are not set via this func‐ tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via the switches. % You can also make these settings via the Mercedes me portal for your user profile. By synchronising the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronising user profiles . Setting the easy entry and exit feature Select Steering Wheel & Seat, Steering Wheel Only or Off. % If you use an individual user profile and have set your body size, this information is carried over for the easy entry and exit feature. This causes the driver's seat and steering wheel to automatically move into the correct posi‐ tion . # Overview of massage programs R R Hot Relaxing Back Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. Hot Relaxing Shoulder Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. Seats and stowing 109 R R R R R Activating Massage Activating massage with upward-moving massage waves. Classic Massage Relaxing back massage. Wave Massage Regenerating massage via massage waves across the back and in the seat cushion. Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing Massage with upward-moving massage waves. Can pro‐ mote deeper respiration and hence improve circulation and blood pressure. Active Workout, Backrest and Active Workout, Cushion These programs require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it. Selecting the massage program for the front seats Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select a massage program (/ page 108). Start the program for the desired seat ;. To set the massage intensity: switch High Intensity on or off. % For the rear seats, the massage program can be selected on the following devices (if avail‐ able): R On the rear displays The selection can be made for the rear seats on the second and third rows of seats. R On the MBUX rear tablet The selection is made in the same way as on the rear displays for the rear seats on the second row of seats. # # Resetting seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort # Select ß for the desired seat. # Confirm the prompt. Switching the seat heating on/off & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐ edly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. The health of persons with limited tempera‐ ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly. * NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on When the seat heating is switched on, over‐ heating may occur due to objects or docu‐ 110 Seats and stowing ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush‐ ions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu‐ ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on. Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. Seat heating in the cockpit Seat heating in the rear passenger compartment Seats and stowing 111 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is switched off. Setting the panel heating Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Panel Heating When the seat heating is switched on, the armr‐ ests, the door center panel and the center con‐ sole can be heated. # Switch the function for the desired seats on or off. Seat heating in the third row of seats Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off. % The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, # Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. Seat ventilation in the cockpit 112 Seats and stowing Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion. Seat ventilation in the rear passenger compartment # Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. Depending on the ventilation level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indi‐ cator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas‐ ten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐ dren when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # To unlock: push release lever 1 down as far as it will go. Seats and stowing 113 # # # Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel. To lock: push release lever 1 up as far as it will go. Check and make sure that the steering col‐ umn is locked by moving the steering wheel. R The ignition is switched on. # To switch on: push the switch to position 1. Indicator lamp 3 lights up. To switch off: push the switch to position 2. Indicator lamp 3 goes out. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically The steering wheel can be adjusted when the ignition is switched off. 1 To adjust the distance to the steering wheel 2 To adjust the height # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 115). # Switching the steering wheel heater on or off Requirements: 114 Seats and stowing When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater switches off. Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature & WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process for the easy exit feature You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc‐ ess is complete before pulling away. # If someone becomes trapped, move the steering wheel adjustment lever. The adjustment process will be stop‐ ped. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch. The adjustment process will be stop‐ ped. You can stop the adjustment process by press‐ ing one of the memory function position switches. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while adjusting the easy entry and exit feature & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during activation of the easy entry and exit feature by children You and other vehicle occupants could become trapped. # Ensure that no-one has a body part in the range of movement of the seat or steering wheel. If children activate the easy entry and exit feature, they can become trapped, particu‐ larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driv‐ er's seat will move back in the following situa‐ tions: R You switch the ignition off with the driver's door open. R You open the driver's door with the ignition switched off. % The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already in the rearmost posi‐ tion. The driver's seat backrest will then move for‐ wards only if it is not already in the front‐ most position. Seats and stowing 115 The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the fol‐ lowing cases: R You switch the power supply or the ignition on when the driver's door is closed. R You close the driver's door with the ignition switched on. The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch the ignition off. R You save the seat settings via the memory function If you press one of the memory function position switches, the adjustment process will be stop‐ ped. Operating the memory function & WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driv‐ er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is station‐ ary. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐ ting the seat with the memory function When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particu‐ larly children – could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. # If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjust‐ ment switch immediately. & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children Children could become trapped if they acti‐ vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. You can use the memory function when the igni‐ tion is switched off. Storing Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Front seat R Outside mirrors R Head-up Display R Steering column R Seat contour 116 Seats and stowing # To call up: press and briefly hold preset posi‐ tion button 4, T or U. After releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position. Memory function in the rear passenger compartment Operating the rear seat via the memory func‐ tion in the rear passenger compartment # # Set all systems to the desired position. Briefly press the V memory button and then press preset position 4, T or U within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. Storing Seat adjustments for the rear seat can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear passenger compartment. R Driver's side: two persons R Front passenger side: one person You can save the following settings for the rear seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec‐ tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest # # Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up. Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the door control panel (/ page 98). Seats and stowing 117 Calling up Briefly press memory button M and then press preset position button 1 or 2 within three seconds. The settings for the rear seat are stored in the corresponding preset position. % You cannot store any settings on the button for straightening the fully reclined position. # # # Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up. Press corresponding preset position button 1 or 2. The rear seat moves to the stored position. Operating the front passenger seat and rear seats via the memory function in the rear passenger compartment Requirements: 118 Seats and stowing R For selecting the front passenger seat: the power supply is switched on # Storing Seat adjustments for the front passenger seat and the rear seat can be stored and called up using the rear seat memory function. You can save the following settings for the front passenger seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint You can save the following settings for the rear seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec‐ tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest # # # # Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up. Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the door control panel (/ page 98). Press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door control panel in the rear passenger compartment (/ page 94). Ensure that the indicator lamp in button 1 lights up. Seats and stowing 119 Press memory button M and, within three seconds, press preset position button 1. The settings for the front passenger seat and the rear seat are stored in the preset posi‐ tion. % You cannot store any settings on the buttons for setting and straightening the fully reclined position. # # Press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐ gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. Calling up & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle Press preset position button 1. Both seats move into the stored position. % You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 65). # If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. 120 Seats and stowing # # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If you do not adequately stow objects in the vehicle interior, they could slip or be tossed around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always restrain the objects they contain in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations. # # # Always make sure that objects do not project from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment. & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu‐ pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐ cle is stationary. # # Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. * NOTE Damage to the cup holder When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed. * NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest. Seats and stowing 121 & WARNING Risk of injury due to an open cargo compartment floor If you drive with the cargo compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga‐ rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example # # # Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐ pipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci‐ fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R All vehicles except Mercedes-Maybach vehi‐ cles: always use the partition net when trans‐ porting objects in the cargo compartment. R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly. 122 Seats and stowing Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Overview of the front storage compartments 3 Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: storage/tele‐ phone compartment with temperature-con‐ trolled cup holder, USB ports (depending on the vehicle equipment) and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones (depending on the vehicle equipment) in the front center console 4 Glove box # Make sure that the folding tables are folded in when moving the front seats back. Folding out This equipment is available only for MercedesMaybach vehicles. Folding the folding table out or in & WARNING Risk of injury from an open folding table 1 Storage space in the doors 2 Storage compartment in the armrest with USB ports (depending on vehicle equipment) 3 Storage/telephone compartment with cup holder in the center console at front Vehicle occupants may bump into the folding table and injure themselves. # Close the folding table before each jour‐ ney. * NOTE Damage to the folding tables when moving the seats back Open folding tables may be damaged when the seats are moved back. # # # # Open rear armrest 1. Pull the folding table forwards and upwards by recess 2 or 3 and swing outwards. Fold the table panels apart. To fold in: fold the table panels together and swing in the folding table. Seats and stowing 123 Opening the stowage box in the backrest in the rear compartment Removing the handset from the storage com‐ partment in the rear passenger compart‐ ment * NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight Opening the drawer This equipment is available only for MercedesMaybach vehicles with individual rear seats. When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest. This equipment is available only for MercedesMaybach vehicles. Vehicles with individual seats (example) # # Vehicles with 5-seater variant: fold down the rear armrest. Pull handle 1 and fold down cover 2. Vehicles with individual rear seats 124 Seats and stowing # # Press button 1. Remove the handset. Closing the drawer # Place the handset in the drawer. # Press the handset drawer back until it engages. Through-loading facility to cargo compart‐ ment Folding the rear seat backrest forwards & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats When you adjust a seat, you may trap your‐ self or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. & WARNING Risk of accident if the seat and seat backrest are not engaged R The seat and seat backrest can fold for‐ wards. There is a risk of the following, in particular: R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or positioned and will no longer fulfill its function as intended. R The seat backrest will not be able restrain objects or goods in the cargo compart‐ ment. R Always ensure that the seat and seat back‐ rest are engaged, in particular: R Before persons travel in the vehicle while sitting on a seat with the easy entry and exit feature R After you have adjusted the seat After the easy entry and exit feature has been used After the cargo compartment enlarge‐ ment has been folded forwards Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back into place. Make sure that the red marking of the lock verifi‐ cation indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest will not be locked. Requirements: R Vehicles with a center seat backrest: the center seat backrest is not in the cargo com‐ partment floor position. R Vehicles with a folding rear armrest: the rear armrest has been folded up. Seats and stowing 125 If a seat in the second row of seats is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. % Seven-seaters: all seat backrests can be fol‐ ded forwards together using the ALL button. Folding the rear passenger compartment center seat backrest forwards separately (seven-seaters) Seven-seater (example) # To fold the left or right seat backrest for‐ wards: briefly press one of buttons 1. The head restraint on the seat backrest will move into a suitable position. The rear seat folds forwards. Vehicles with a center seat backrest: the center seat backrest folds forwards together with the left seat backrest. # # Press release catch 3. Fold seat backrest 2 forwards. Folding back the rear seat backrest * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ ped when folding back the seat back‐ rest. 126 Seats and stowing If a seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction dis‐ play on the instrument cluster. % Seven-seaters: all seat backrests can be fol‐ ded back together using the ALL button. Folding the seat backrest on the third row of seats forwards Folding back the center seat backrest sepa‐ rately (seven-seaters) # Swing the seat backrest back until it audibly engages. Seven-seater (example) # To fold back the seat backrest: briefly pull one of buttons 1. The rear seat folds back. Vehicles with a center seat backrest: the center seat backrest folds back together with the left seat backrest. Left-hand-drive vehicle (example) # In the rear passenger compartment (sevenseater): briefly pull one of buttons 1. Seats and stowing 127 Folding back the seat backrest on the third row of seats # In the cargo compartment: briefly press one of buttons 1. # Left-hand-drive vehicle (example) # In the rear passenger compartment: briefly press one of buttons 1. If a seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction dis‐ play on the instrument cluster. In the cargo compartment: briefly pull one of buttons 1. If a seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction dis‐ play on the instrument cluster. 128 Seats and stowing EASY-PACK cargo compartment cover and partition net cassette Notes on the cargo compartment cover # Do not place any objects above the lower edge of the side windows or on the cargo compartment cover. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects This equipment is available for all vehicles except Mercedes-Maybach vehicles. The cargo compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, par‐ ticularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover. Extending/retracting the cargo compart‐ ment cover * NOTE Damage to the cargo compart‐ ment cover when loading the vehicle The cargo compartment cover may be dam‐ aged when the vehicle is being loaded. # To extend: pull the cargo compartment cover back by grab handle 1 and clip it into brackets 2 on the left and right. Retracting # Remove the cargo compartment cover from the brackets on the left and right. # Guide the cargo compartment cover for‐ wards using the grab handle until it is fully retracted. The rolled-up cargo compartment cover can be used in two positions: R Folded 45° upwards for loading (fold down before commencing your journey) R Horizontal position Installing or removing the cargo compart‐ ment cover Requirements: R The cargo compartment cover is rolled up. Seats and stowing 129 Removing the cargo compartment cover Installing the cargo compartment cover # # # # # Press end cap 1 on the left or right inwards. Pull out the cargo compartment cover back‐ wards. Storing the cargo compartment cover The cargo compartment cover can be stored beneath the cargo compartment floor. Open the cargo compartment floor . To insert: place cargo compartment cover 1 into brackets 2. Ensure it is seated cor‐ rectly. To remove: take the cargo compartment cover out of brackets 2. # Place the cargo compartment cover in brack‐ ets 1 on the left and right. The end caps of the cargo compartment cover engage audibly. 130 Seats and stowing Attaching/removing the partitioning net & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects This equipment is available for all vehicles except Mercedes-Maybach vehicles. The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, par‐ ticularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the partitioning net. For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load. The partitioning net can be used with or without cargo compartment enlargement Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfill their functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Partitioning net with cargo compartment enlargement Partitioning net without cargo compartment enlargement # # # To attach: extend the partition net. Attach the top guide rod to holders 1 on the headliner. Engage hooks 2 in eyelets 3 on the left and right. Seats and stowing 131 # # # # # Overview of bag hooks Pull on the loose ends of the lashing straps until the partitioning net is tight. After driving a short distance, check the ten‐ sion of the partitioning net and re-tension it if necessary. To remove: pull the belt clamps until the lashing straps are loose. Remove hooks 2 from eyelets 3 on the left and right. Remove the top guide rod from the holders 1. & WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. Overview of the tie-down eyes in the cargo compartment Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 119). 1 Cargo tie-down rings The front tie-down eyes are accessible when the third row of seats is in the cargo compartment floor position (/ page 124). % Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: both tie-down eyes on Mercedes-Maybach vehicles are located in the rear of the cargo compart‐ ment, left and right. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 119). Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 6.6 lbs (3 kg) and do not attach any goods to them. 132 Seats and stowing 1 Coat hook on the tailgate Coat hooks are not suitable for heavy objects. Use the coat hooks only for light objects such as jackets. 1 Bag hook Coat hook on the tailgate This equipment is available for all vehicles except Mercedes-Maybach vehicles. Locking and unlocking the cargo compart‐ ment floor This equipment is available for all vehicles except Mercedes-Maybach vehicles. # Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock‐ wise 2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to unlock). Seats and stowing 133 Attaching a roof luggage rack # & WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section. * NOTE Vehicle damage from nonapproved roof luggage racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof lug‐ gage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Use only roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is installed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the tailgate can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is installed. Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. * NOTE Damage to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel due to nonapproved roof luggage racks The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # When a roof luggage rack is installed, open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel only if this has been tested and approved for MercedesBenz. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. # # Secure the roof luggage rack to the roof rail‐ ing. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Cup holder Switching the cooling or heating function for the temperature-controlled cup holder on or off & WARNING Risk of injury by touching the heating elements The cup holder's heating elements may be very hot. You can burn yourself on them. 134 Seats and stowing # # # Do not touch the cup holder's hot heat‐ ing elements. Ensure that no children can access the cup holder's hot heating elements. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. * NOTE Damage to objects in the tempera‐ ture-controlled cup holder If you place objects into the temperaturecontrolled cup holder, they may become damaged. # Do not place objects into the tempera‐ ture-controlled cup holder. Cup holder in the front center console Cup holder in the rear passenger compartment cen‐ ter console Seats and stowing 135 To switch off: press button 2 repeatedly until the indicator lamp on the button goes out. % Clean the removable rubber mat only with clean, lukewarm water and the cup holder only with a soft cloth. # Cup holder in the rear passenger compartment cen‐ ter console (Mercedes-Maybach four-seater vehi‐ cles) # To switch on: on cup holder 1, press but‐ ton 2 repeatedly until the blue (keep cool) or red (keep warm) indicator lamp on the but‐ ton lights up. If you use the heating function, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a certain temperature has been reached, the warning lamp lights up. Do not reach into the cup holder's metal insert when the warning lamp is lit. Sockets Using the 12 V socket in the front center console Requirements: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 240 W (20 A). Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the storage compartment in the front cen‐ ter console R In the cargo compartment Example: 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console # Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the storage compart‐ ment open. 136 Seats and stowing Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐ rect handling of the socket & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐ aged connecting cables or sockets You could receive an electric shock in partic‐ ular: R If you reach into the socket. R If you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket. You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. # Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage. # When the ignition is switched off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. # Immediately have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced at a quali‐ fied specialized workshop if it is dam‐ aged or has been pulled out of the trim. # Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. # # Do not reach into the socket. Only connect suitable devices to the socket. Requirements: R Only connect devices with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 150 watts (1.30 A). R Do not use multiple socket outlets. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the center console and storage compartment may differ. Using the 115 V socket in the center console of the rear passenger compartment Seats and stowing 137 # Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. Overview of USB ports 115 V socket in the center console of the rear passenger compartment (Mercedes-Maybach 4seat vehicles) # # Mercedes-Maybach vehicles with individual rear seats: open the storage compartment of the center console of the rear passenger compartment . Open flap 3. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports: R In the storage compartment of the cockpit armrest (/ page 122) R In the front center console next to the mobile phone storage compartment R In the rear passenger compartment center console R Vehicles with Rear Comfort Package: in the center armrest of the second row of seats in the rear compartment R Mercedes-Maybach vehicles with 5 seats in the rear passenger compartment: in the cen‐ ter armrest in the rear passenger compart‐ ment R R Mercedes-Maybach vehicles with individual rear seats: in the center console of the rear passenger compartment Vehicles with three rows of seats: to the right and left next to the seat If the ignition is switched on you can charge USB devices, e.g. mobile phones, at USB ports. The charging voltage is approximately 5 V (up to 3 A). Refrigerator box Using the refrigerator box & WARNING Risk of fire due to a covered vent grille on the refrigerator box If you cover the vent grille for the refrigerator box, it may overheat. # Always make sure that the vent grille is not covered. The ventilation grille for the refrigerator box is in the trunk. 138 Seats and stowing This equipment is available only for MercedesMaybach vehicles. Subject the refrigerator box to a maximum load of 7.7 lb (3.5 kg) . Store only plastic bottles in the upper compart‐ ment of the refrigerator box. The contents of the bottle must be no more than 17 fl. oz. (0.5 liters). If you do not need to use the refrigerator box for an extended period, switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time. The refrigerator box will reduce its cooling capa‐ city or switch off in the following cases: R Too many electrical consumers are turned on. R The starter battery is not sufficiently charged. If this is the case, the indicator lamps will flash on the button for switching the refrigerator box on and off. The cooling function will automati‐ cally switch back on as soon as there is suffi‐ cient voltage. % To install the refrigerator box in the cargo compartment or remove it, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Example: vehicles with individual rear seats # Example: vehicles with individual rear seats # # Vehicles with 5-seater variant: fold down the rear armrest. Pull the handle of stowage box 1 and fold down the cover of stowage box 2. # To open: pull the handle of refrigerator box 1 and fold down the cover of the refrigera‐ tor box. To switch on: press button 2 repeatedly until an indicator lamp (low cooling) lights up or two indicator lamps (high cooling) light up. Seats and stowing 139 # To switch off: press button 2 repeatedly until both indicator lamps go out. Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can‐ not be thrown around in such situa‐ tions. # # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart‐ ment. * NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stor‐ age compartment Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, data storage devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compart‐ ment. & WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids # Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal. If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. Always observe the notes for persons with elec‐ tronic medical aids (/ page 29). 140 Seats and stowing R R R R R R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. The charging function and wireless connec‐ tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the igni‐ tion is switched on. Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone storage compartment. Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone storage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. To ensure more efficient charging and con‐ nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are neces‐ sary for wireless charging are excluded. Wireless charging of a mobile phone in the cockpit Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. % A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/ Malfunctions detected during the charging process are shown in the multimedia system display. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. Wireless charging of a mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment * NOTE Damage to the drawer in the cen‐ ter console of the rear passenger com‐ partment due to body weight When open, the drawer in the center console of the rear passenger compartment can be damaged by body weight. # Do not support yourself on the open drawer. # Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐ ter of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Requirements: R The mobile phone must be suitable for wire‐ less charging. Seats and stowing 141 % A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/ Installing/removing the floor mats & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Mat in the center console of the rear passenger compartment (only Mercedes-Maybach vehicles with individual rear seats) Mat in front of the stowage compartment in the rear armrest # Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐ ter of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the indicator lamp lights up, the mobile phone is being charged. Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. 142 Seats and stowing Installing floor mats row of seats, slide the corresponding seat on the second row of seats forwards. Removing floor mats # To remove: pull the floor mat off the holders 2. # Remove the floor mat. % Vehicles with a third row of seats (all vehicles except Mercedes-Maybach vehi‐ cles): to remove the floor mats on the third row of seats, slide the corresponding seat on the second row of seats forwards. Move the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell. # Press studs 1 onto holders 2. # Adjust the corresponding seat. % Vehicles with a third row of seats (all vehicles except Mercedes-Maybach vehi‐ cles): to install the floor mats on the third # Light and visibility 143 Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility Light switch Operating the light switch 5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/off When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lamps will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi‐ cient lighting, in accordance with the rele‐ vant legal stipulations. The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation. * NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X or left W parking light. 1 2 3 4 W Left-hand standing lamps X Right-hand standing lamps T Parking lamps and license plate lamp à Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) In the event of severe battery discharging, the parking lamps or standing lamps will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start. 144 Light and visibility The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐ ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting (/ page 148). Automatic driving lights function The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run‐ ning lamps are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the ambi‐ ent light. & WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to L. The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. Switching the rear fog lamps on or off Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à posi‐ tion. # Operating the combination switch for the lights Press the R button. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. % Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL with off-road package: when the rear fog lamp is switched on, off-road level +3 will not be available. If the rear fog lamp is switched on and off-road level +3 is acti‐ vated, the vehicle will be lowered to off-road level +2. 1 2 3 4 High beam Turn signal light, right High-beam flasher Turn signal light, left # Use the combination switch to activate the desired function. Light and visibility 145 High beam # To switch on: turn the light switch to the L or à position. # Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam is deactivated and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam. # To switch off: push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3. # To indicate permanently: push the combi‐ nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R Indicator operation activated by the driver can extend for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically. Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights High-beam flasher # Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. Turn signal light To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times. # Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto‐ matically if: R The airbag has been deployed. # When the indicator is activated, the hazard warn‐ ing lights are interrupted. 146 Light and visibility Cornering light Cornering light function R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) when the steering wheel is turned Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the intersec‐ tion. Adaptive Highbeam Assist The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc‐ tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active under the following condi‐ tions: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned Adaptive Highbeam Assist function & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐ trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier R On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto‐ matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. System limits Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to Light and visibility 147 the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐ tions. At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will be switched on automatically. The high beam switches off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h). R If other road users are detected. R If street lighting is sufficient. At speeds greater than approximately 31 mph (50 km/h): R The headlamp range of the low beam is regu‐ lated automatically based on the distance to other road users. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off # To switch on: turn the light switch to the à position. # # Switch on the high beam using the combina‐ tion switch. When the high beam is switched on automat‐ ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display will light up. To switch off: switch off the high beam using the combination switch. Switching the daytime running lamps on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Daytime Run. Lights # Activate D or deactivate E the func‐ tion. Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position. 148 Light and visibility Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time. # Activate or deactivate the function. Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting # To switch on or off: press button 1 – 5 accordingly. Control panel in the grab handle Front overhead control panel Switching the surround lighting on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Locator Lighting When Locator Lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur‐ round lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. Illuminated running boards: when the sur‐ round lighting is switched on, the illumination of the running boards is activated when a door is opened. If the door is not closed, the running board courtesy lighting is automatically deactiva‐ ted after 40 seconds. 1 p Rear reading lamp # 1 2 3 4 5 p Front left reading lamp | Automatic interior lighting control c Front interior lighting u Rear interior lighting p Front right reading lamp To switch on or off: press button 1. Light and visibility 149 Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Ambient Lighting 5 Light Setting the color Select Color. # Set the desired color. # Adjusting the brightness Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness. Activating the brightness for zones Select Brightness. # Select Brightness Zones. The ACCENT, AMBIANCE and ROOF zones can be set separately. # Activating multi-color lighting Select Color. # Select Multi-color. # Select a color combination. # Activating multi-color animation # Select Color. # Select Multi-color Animation. The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals. Activating welcome lighting Select Color. # Select Welcome. When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi‐ ent lighting sequence will run. # Activating dependency on air conditioning settings # Select Color. # Select Climate. If changes are made to the temperature set‐ ting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly. Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch the switch-off delay time on or off. When this function is active, the interior light‐ ing lights up for a short time after the vehicle is locked. 150 Light and visibility Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast # # Switching the rear window wiper on/off Turn the combination switch to the correct position 1 - 5. Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wipes with washer fluid Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: in position 2 or 3 , the windshield washing proc‐ ess is automatically triggered if dirt is detected on the windshield unless the Check Washer Fluid message is being displayed. 1 ô Single wipe/washing 2 è Intermittent wipe 1 g Windshield wipers off 2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal 3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent # # Single wipe: press button 1 to the point of resistance. Wiping with washer fluid: press button 1 beyond the point of resistance. Light and visibility 151 # Switching intermittent wipe on/off: press button 2. Vehicles with rain sensor: The wipe inter‐ val automatically adapts to the driving condi‐ tions. The è symbol will appear on the instru‐ ment cluster when the rear window wiper is switched on. Changing the windshield wiper blades & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before changing the wiper blades. Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and switch off again immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 150). The wiper arms will move into the replace‐ ment position. Removing the wiper blades Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐ shield. # # # # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐ tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm as far as it will go. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4. 152 Light and visibility Installing the wiper blades # # # # # # # Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position. Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor‐ rectly. Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐ shield. Switch on the ignition. Press the î button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will move into the original position. Switch the ignition off. Maintenance display # Remove protective film 1 from the mainte‐ nance display on the tip of the newly instal‐ led wiper blades. When the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. Light and visibility 153 % The duration until the color changes varies depending on the usage conditions. Removing the wiper blades Replacing the windshield wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL) # To remove the wiper blade: press release knob 2, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 3 and remove. Installing the wiper blades Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch off the ignition. # Within around 15 seconds, press the î button on the combination switch (/ page 150). The wiper arms will move into the replace‐ ment position. # To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly in one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 1 beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click. # Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 until release knob 2 engages. 154 Light and visibility # # Installing the wiper blade Press the wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 3 beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again. Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. Replacing the rear window wiper blade & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before changing the wiper blades. Removing the wiper blade # Switch the ignition off. # # Fold wiper arm 2 away from the rear win‐ dow until it engages in the replacement posi‐ tion. Unclip wiper blade 1 from wiper arm 2 and remove it in the direction of arrow 3. # # # Position wiper blade 1 with both lugs 3 on holder 2 on the wiper arm. Push wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages in holder 2. Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated cor‐ rectly. Light and visibility 155 # Fold the wiper arm from the replacement position back onto the rear window. Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi‐ cle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas‐ ten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐ judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror Folding the outside mirrors in/out The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. # Therefore, always look over your shoul‐ der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you. # Briefly press button 2. % If the battery has been disconnected or has discharged, the outside mirrors must be moved briefly using button 2. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. 156 Light and visibility % Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: when the out‐ side mirrors fold in, the extendable running boards will retract if these were previously extended. Adjusting the outside mirrors # Press button 1 or 3 to select the outside mirror to be adjusted. # Press button 4 to adjust the position of the mirror glass. Engaging the outside mirrors If an outside mirror has been forcibly disen‐ gaged, proceed as follows. # Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position. # Vehicles with electrically folding outside mir‐ rors: press and hold button 2. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi‐ bly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position. Automatic anti-glare mirrors function & WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi‐ soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec‐ trolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con‐ tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro‐ lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐ ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror. System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The engine is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on. Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐ tion function % The parking position is available only in vehi‐ cles with a memory function. The parking position makes parking easier. Light and visibility 157 In the following situations, the front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passeng‐ er's side: R The parking position is stored (/ page 157) R The front-passenger mirror is selected R Reverse gear is engaged. Storing and calling up the parking position of the front-passenger outside mirror Storing Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 1. # Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move to the stored parking position. Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position in the following sit‐ uations: R You shift the transmission to another trans‐ mission position R You are traveling at speeds greater than 9 mph (15 km/h) R You press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic Folding on or off. # # # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 1. Engage reverse gear. Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 2. 158 Light and visibility Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys‐ tems, can be mounted only on areas 1 of the windshield that are permeable to radio waves. Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi‐ ble from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated with an external light source. Note this position for vehicles with: R Windshield heating R Infrared reflective windshield Infrared-reflective windshield function The infrared-reflective windshield is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle inte‐ rior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves. Climate control 159 7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control An interior air filter in combination with the pre‐ filter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollu‐ tion level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cap and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car‐ ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. (/ page 162) 8 Á Switches the A/C function on/off Example: control panel for dual-zone automatic cli‐ mate control with stationary heater 1 w Sets the driver's side temperature 2 A Calls up/exits the air conditioning Overview of the air conditioning control panel The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated. 3 4 5 6 menu Pressing and holding (approx. four seconds): resets climate control to the basic settings H Sets the airflow or switches off climate control à Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 161) ¬ Defrosts the windshield ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off (/ page 160) Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 162) 9 Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control or 3-zone auto‐ matic climate control without stationary heater: 0 switches synchronization on/off (/ page 162) Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control or 3-zone auto‐ matic climate control with stationary heater: & switches stationary heater on/off A w Sets the temperature on the front passenger side 160 Climate control Overview of the rear operating unit The settings for the second and third row of seats (equipment-dependent) can be made via the rear operating unit, the multimedia system (/ page 161) or the MBUX rear tablet depend‐ ing on the vehicle's equipment. Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the H button. # To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using the H button. % If climate control is switched off, the win‐ dows may fog up more quickly. Switch off climate control only briefly. # Example: USA 1 Sets the temperature, left 2 Sets the air distribution, left 3 Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 161) 4 Sets the airflow 5 Switches climate control on/off (/ page 160) Switches the residual heat on/off (/ page 163) 6 Sets the air distribution, right 7 Sets the temperature, right Switching the climate control in the rear passenger compartment on/off Press button 5. % When climate control in the second seat row is switched off, the indicator lamp is activa‐ ted and OFF is shown on the rear display. # Switching the A/C function on or off via the control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Press the Á button. Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other‐ wise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not a sign that there is a malfunction. Calling up the air conditioning menu Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the lower edge of the media display. Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. Climate control 161 # # # Call up the air-conditioning menu (/ page 160). Select First Row of Seats. Select A/C. Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐ trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the à button. # To switch to manual mode: press the à button. In automatic mode, you can choose between five different air quantities using the H button. Automatic mode is retained. Automatically controlling the climate control in the rear passenger compartment In automatic mode, the set temperature is regu‐ lated by the temperature of the dispensed air and the airflow. # Press the à button (/ page 160). Setting the air distribution Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 160). # Select a row of seats. # To set the air distribution: select ¯, P or O. # Set the airflow. % Several air distribution options can be selec‐ ted at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windshield and the footwells simultaneously. The ¯ climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row. # Setting climate control for the rear passenger compartment (multimedia sys‐ tem) Setting the temperature Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 160). # # # Select Second Row of Seats or Third Row of Seats. For Maybach vehicles: select Second Row of Seats. % Maybach vehicles are equipped with one and two rows of seats. # Set the temperature. Setting the airflow # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 160). # Select Second Row of Seats or Third Row of Seats. # For Maybach vehicles: select Second Row of Seats. % Maybach vehicles are equipped with one and two rows of seats. # Set the airflow. 162 Climate control Controlling the rear climate control automat‐ ically # Select REAR AUTO. Rear climate control is controlled automati‐ cally. Deactivating rear climate control Select REAR OFF. Rear climate control is deactivated. # Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the control panel Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the multimedia system Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 160). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select SYNC. Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature and air distribution setting for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for all climate control zones. # Press the 0 button. Removing condensation from the windows The synchronization function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate zones are changed. Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the à button. Windows fogged up on the inside # Press the à button. # If the windows continue to fog up: press the ¬ button. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off # Press the g button. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. Switching the residual heat on or off Requirements: R The vehicle is parked. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐ ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set. # To activate: press Á button. Residual heat will be switched off automatically. Climate control 163 Switching the residual heat in the rear passenger compartment on/off Requirements: R The vehicle is parked. When the residual heat of the engine is activated in the rear compartment, you can heat or venti‐ late the rear passenger compartment for approx‐ imately 30 minutes. # Press button 5 (/ page 160). Activating/deactivating ionization Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odor‐ less. # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 160). # Select Air Quality. # Select IONIZATION. Fragrance system Setting the fragrance system Requirements: R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove box is closed. The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐ grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla‐ con located in the glove box. # Call up the climate control menu (/ page 160). # Select Air Quality. # Select AIR FRESHENER. # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached. Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra‐ grance system & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per‐ fume If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con‐ tact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk. # If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water. # If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. 164 Climate control + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it. Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste. Refillable flacon # Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. # Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml). # Screw the cap back on to the flacon. damage due to improper disposal of full flacons # Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point. 1 Cap 2 Flacon # # To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go. To remove: after opening the glove box, wait for approximately seven seconds and pull out the flacon. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate informa‐ tion sheet with the flacon. Information on the windshield heater The windshield heater is switched on automati‐ cally if the ¬ button is activated. In addition, it is automatically switched on when necessary. Climate control 165 Air vents Adjusting the rear air vents Adjusting the front air vents & WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. # If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and vent grilles in the vehicle interior free. R Keep the air inlet free of deposits (/ page 328). R Optimum climate comfort is achieved with the air vents in the center position. # # # To open or close center air vents: turn controller 2 up or down as far as it will go. To open or close side air vents: turn con‐ troller 2 to the left or right as far as it will go. To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. Air vents in the center console 166 Climate control Air vents above the second and third row of seats (all vehicles except Mercedes-Maybach vehicles) # Air vents in the B-pillar # To set the airflow direction: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it accord‐ ingly. To open or close: turn the controller 2 as far as it will go. Air vents above the second row of seats, towards the cargo compartment (Mercedes-Maybach vehi‐ cles) # To open or close: turn controller 1 as far as it will go. Climate control 167 Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box * NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside it. # Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle. # At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C func‐ tion. The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box. # To open or close: turn controller 1 of air vent 2 clockwise or counter-clockwise. 168 Driving and parking Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles R Observe the notes on the following additional topics in the Supplement, as you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers: R Emotion Start R AMG ACTIVE adaptive sport suspension sys‐ tem In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle. # Switching on the power supply or the igni‐ tion (without engine start) # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle # If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil‐ dren. Also observe the "Notes on pets in the vehicle". Requirements: R the SmartKey is located in the vehicle and the SmartKey battery is not discharged. R the brake pedal is not depressed. # To switch on the power supply: press but‐ ton 1 once. You can activate the windshield wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐ lowing conditions are met: R you open the driver's door. R you press button 1 twice more. Driving and parking 169 To switch on the ignition: press button 1 twice. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R you do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in posi‐ tion j or the electric parking brake is applied. R you press button 1 once. # Starting the vehicle Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐ ton & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Requirements R The SmartKey is located in the vehicle and the SmartKey battery is not discharged. # # Shift the transmission to position j or i. Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once. If the vehicle does not start: switch off nonessential consumers and press button 1 once. # If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual message also appears in the multifunction display: start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 169). % You can switch off the engine while driving by pressing button 1 for about three sec‐ onds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 173). # Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. 170 Driving and parking # must be located in marked space 2 next to symbol 3 during the entire journey. Have SmartKey 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle does not start: Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2 and leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi‐ cle using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or the ignition with the start/stop button. # # # # Make sure that marked space 2 is empty. Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring. Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2 next to symbol 3. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove SmartKey 1 from marked space 2 the engine continues running. For further vehicle starts however, SmartKey 1 Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv‐ ices Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. The starter battery is sufficiently charged. Charging the starter battery before starting the journey If the vehicle battery is discharged, you receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. Driving and parking 171 Starting the vehicle (Remote Online) & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐ ment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unin‐ tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Requirements: R Park position j is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. # Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes. You can carry out a maximum of two consecu‐ tive starting attempts. The vehicle must be star‐ ted once with the SmartKey before trying to start the engine again with the smartphone. you can stop the vehicle again at any time. % Further information can be found in the smartphone app. Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Breaking-in notes Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. To preserve the engine during the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km): R drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. R drive the vehicle in drive program A or ;. R shift to the next highest gear at the very lat‐ est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. R do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. R avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle. R do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown). R only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,000 miles (1,500 km). This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. 172 Driving and parking Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R in certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐ tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐ tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R brakepads, brake discs and tires that are either new or have been replaced only ach‐ ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred miles of driving. Compen‐ sate for the reduced braking effect by apply‐ ing greater force to the brake pedal. Notes on optimized acceleration If all necessary requirements and activation con‐ ditions are fulfilled, the best possible accelera‐ tion can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa‐ tion on ESP® (/ page 203). Pulling away with optimized acceleration & WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning When you use optimized acceleration, indi‐ vidual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skid‐ ding and accident. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle. Requirements: R The vehicle has been broken in (/ page 171). R The vehicle and tires are in good condition. R You are on a high-grip roadway. R The engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature. * NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration When pulling away with optimized accelera‐ tion, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized acceleration. # # # # # # Engage the h drive position (/ page 187). Move the steering wheel to the straightahead position. Select the sportiest available drive program B or C(/ page 184). Deactivate ESP® (/ page 205). Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with your left foot. With your right foot, fully depress the accel‐ erator pedal. Driving and parking 173 # # After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera‐ tion. Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce‐ dure is complete. Ending optimized acceleration Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP®. % After you pull away with optimized accelera‐ tion, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that opti‐ mized acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes. # Notes on driving & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect footwear Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers # Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely. & WARNING Risk of accident when switch‐ ing off the ignition when driving If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. You will then need, for example, to use con‐ siderably more force to steer and brake. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐ ing. & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. 174 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ faces to increase the engine braking effect. & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐ sonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐ tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐ cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run‐ ning. # Open a window on the side of the vehi‐ cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco‐ hol and drugs while driving Driving when under the influence of alcohol and/or drugs is an extremely dangerous combination. Even small quantities of alcohol or drugs may affect your reflexes, perception and judgment. The probability of a serious or even fatal acci‐ dent greatly increases if you drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs. # Do not drink alcohol or take drugs while driving, and do not allow anyone to drive who has been drinking alcohol or taking drugs. & WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over‐ heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving. * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over‐ revving range. Driving and parking 175 * NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal # # Do not depress the brake pedal contin‐ uously whilst driving. To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away # # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐ ately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐ lytic converter. # # Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front To remove salt build-up: R brake occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip‐ itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R reduce speed R avoid tire ruts R avoid sudden steering movements R brake carefully % Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 356). Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. 176 Driving and parking Observe the following if you must drive through water: R Observe the maximum permissible fording depth (/ page 403). R Drive at walking pace at most, otherwise water can enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi‐ cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water. The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. Notes on off-road driving & WARNING Risk of accident if you do not keep to line of fall on inclines If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and roll‐ over. # Always drive on inclines in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn. & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or offroad, regularly check the vehicle under‐ side. # Remove trapped plants or other flam‐ mable material, in particular. # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. When driving off-road, sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil may get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking effect or total brake failure as a result of increased wear. The braking characteristics will vary depending on the material that has entered the system. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you then notice reduced braking effect or hear scraping noises, have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Adapt your driving style to the changed braking characteris‐ tics. * NOTE Damage caused by driving over obstacles The vehicle can be damaged by: R driving up onto high curbs or unpaved roads. R quickly driving over obstacles such as curbs, speed bumps or potholes. R heavy objects hitting the underbody or chassis components. # # # Do not drive over obstacles that could damage the vehicle. Check the vehicle regularly for damage during off-road driving. Adjust the vehicle speed to suit the road surface conditions. Driving and parking 177 # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to non-observance of pro‐ hibition signs Environmental protection has priority. Treat nature with respect. # Be sure to observe prohibition signs. Checklist before driving off-road Check the following points before driving offroad: R Fuel level R Engine oil level: fill engine oil to the maxi‐ mum level to ensure full gradeability (/ page 324). R Tire-change tool kit and spare wheel R Tires and wheels % Further information about special all-terrain tires for retrofitting can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Off-road driving Read this section before driving your vehicle offroad. Practice by driving over more gentle offroad terrain first. R Observe the notes on the cross-country ABS (/ page 203). R If necessary, select the F or G drive program (vehicles with an Off-road package) before driving off-road (/ page 184). R Before driving off-road, shift the transfer case to the LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehi‐ cles with an Offroad package) (/ page 190). R Select a vehicle level suitable for off-road ter‐ rain (/ page 231). To avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance. R R Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on downhill gradients and slopes. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain. Do not drive on unknown terrain that is not easily visible and stay on marked routes. R R R R Always keep the doors and windows closed while the vehicle is in motion. Deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and cruise control. Adapt your driving style to the terrain. Do not use the HOLD function on steep downhill or uphill gradients with slippery or loose surfaces. Driving on sand When driving on sand, also observe the following instructions: R Select the F drive program. R Select a higher vehicle level. R Shift to a lower gear. R Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resist‐ ance, otherwise the vehicle may dig itself in. R Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi‐ ble. Make sure that the following prerequi‐ sites are met: the tire ruts are not too deep the sand is firm enough 178 Driving and parking - the ground clearance is sufficient Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. Fording Also observe the following information when fording: R Drive no faster than 6 mph (10 km/h). R Observe the maximum permissible fording depth (/ page 403). R Switch off automatic climate control (/ page 161). R Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you drive. R Do not stop in the water and do not switch off the engine. Ensure the ECO start/stop function is switched off (/ page 180). Driving in mountainous terrain Also observe the following information when driving in mountainous terrain: R Observe the values of the approach/depar‐ ture angle and of the maximum gradient (/ page 403). R Avoid high engine speeds. R Use the braking power of the engine when driving downhill. R Shift to a lower gear on uphill gradients and on long, steep downhill gradients. R Activate DSR before driving downhill, if nec‐ essary (/ page 214). Checklist after driving off-road Driving off-road places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. Check the entire vehicle for damage and foreign bodies every time after driving off-road. Foreign bodies in the wheels or drivetrain can lead to imbalan‐ ces and therefore vibrations. R If the F or G drive program is selec‐ ted: select another drive program. R Shift the transfer case to the on-road posi‐ tion HIGH RANGE. R R R R R R Deactivate DSR. Lower the vehicle level again to a level suita‐ ble to the road conditions, e.g. to the normal level. Apply the brakes to dry them after fording. Check that the service brake is working nor‐ mally after a long downhill stretch. Clean the following components every time after driving off-road: license plate number headlamps and tail lamps tires, wheels and wheel arches underbody After driving through sand, mud, water or gravel, have the following components checked and cleaned: brake discs and brakepads tires and wheels axle joints Driving and parking 179 ECO start/stop function Operation of the ECO start/stop function Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. % The ECO start/stop function is available only in the C, A, ;, N and = drive programs (depending on the setting). The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐ mission position h or i. R vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed. If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R you stop at a stop sign and there is no vehi‐ cle in front of you. R the vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again. R you maneuver, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear. % When the HOLD function is active and in transmission position j, the engine can stop in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor. The engine is restarted automatically if: R you engage transmission position h or k. R you depress the accelerator pedal. R an automatic engine start is required by the vehicle. R you release the brake pedal. R vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll. the vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h). ECO start/stop function symbols in the multi‐ function display: R the è symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R the ç symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi‐ tions for an engine stop have been met. R neither the è nor ç symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli‐ gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign. R the s symbol appears: the ECO start/ stop function is deactivated or there is a mal‐ function. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐ ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the multifunction display: Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting 180 Driving and parking If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is automatically switched off after three minutes. Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function Press button 1. A display appears in the instrument cluster when switching the ECO start/stop function off/on. % A continuous s display appears in the instrument cluster while the ECO start/stop function is deactivated. # ECO display function The ECO display summarizes your driving char‐ acteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can influence consumption by doing the fol‐ lowing: R Drive with particular care R Drive the vehicle in drive program ; R Follow the gearshift recommendations The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will fill up when the following driving style is adop‐ ted: R 1 Steady speed R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Moderate acceleration The lettering in the segment will be gray, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adop‐ ted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed R 2 Heavy braking Driving and parking 181 R 3 Sporty acceleration The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three segments will fill up completely at the same time R The edges around all three segments will light up The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the center of display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption. ECO Assist function Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ tem (EQ Boost technology): ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expec‐ ted route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead, e.g. a speed limit or a roundabout, it will appear on the multifunction display. The following symbols can be displayed: Examples of an event ahead 1 Event ahead 2 Distance display for the event ahead 3 "Foot off the accelerator" prompt Distance display segments 2 show the dis‐ tance to the event ahead as follows: R A few segments light up: the event ahead is near. R Many segments light up: the event ahead is further away. When the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradient. The 182 Driving and parking Foot off the Accelerator3 message appears in the multifunction display. The first segments in front of the vehicle will turn green. The remain‐ ing segments will initially stay white. If the driver takes their foot off the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will successively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for maximum fuel economy. Recuperation will charge the bat‐ tery. Recuperation will be adapted to the selec‐ ted drive program. The event will be shown for a short time after it has been passed. If there is no response to the Foot off the Accelerator prompt, the segments will remain white. If the event involves a vehicle in front, all seg‐ ments will immediately turn green once there is a response to the Foot off the Accelerator prompt. For active ECO Assist in drive program ;, symbol 3 will appear on the multifunction dis‐ play and on the Head-up Display beside trans‐ mission position h. Symbol 3 will also appear when the assistant display is not selected. If the system does not intervene during the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The sys‐ tem is passive. ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ; and A. System limits ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available with‐ out active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The qual‐ ity depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsi‐ ble for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all times irrespective of whether the system intervenes. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R R R R R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. If there is dirt on the windshield in the area of the multifunction camera or the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. If traffic signs are hard to discern, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured. If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date. If signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. % Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs. Driving and parking 183 Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs: = (Individual): individual settings B (Sport +): particularly sporty driving style C (Sport): sporty driving style A (Comfort): comfortable and economical driving style £ (Maybach): highest level of driving com‐ fort for comfortable and luxurious travel (Mercedes-Maybach vehicles only) ; (Eco): particularly economical driving style N (CURVE): comfortable driving with curve inclination function (vehicles with E‑ACTIVE BODY CONTROL) F Offroad: driving on less demanding offroad terrain G (Offroad +): driving on difficult off-road terrain % Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: in the drive programs F and G, the extendible running boards remain retracted or retract if they have already been extended. % The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display of the on-board com‐ puter. % Depending on the situation, the cylinder can be briefly switched on in the drive pro‐ grams ; and A, depending on the engine. Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive Engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP® R Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E‑ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: Suspension tuning Vehicle level R Electric power steering Notes on the roof load display Certain drive programs and ESP® settings are unsuitable for transporting a roof load. If one of these drive programs is set or selected, symbol is shown as a warning. When the this symbol is shown, the selected drive program is not suitable for transporting a load on the roof. The following drive programs are affected: R Sport drive program R Sport + drive program R Individual drive program with the ESP® set‐ ting Sport or Sport+ % The symbol is also shown in the following sit‐ uations: R Within the themes if a corresponding drive program is saved For more information on themes see . 184 Driving and parking R Within the reset display if the previously active drive program is unsuitable for the transport of a roof load For further information on the reset dis‐ play, see (/ page 184). Selecting the drive program # Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display. Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 DYNAMIC SELECT 5 Vehicle Setting drive program I Select Individual Configuration. # Select and set a category. # Switching the restoration display on or off # Switch Request at Start on or off. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi‐ tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is star‐ ted the A drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated auto‐ matically. % This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile. Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed. Driving and parking 185 Displaying engine data Calling up the consumption indicator Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine. The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine tor‐ que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Factors that can influence this are, for exam‐ ple: R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine % The values displayed serve only as orienta‐ tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may deviate from the actual values. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption. The current and average consumption is dis‐ played. Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect gearshifting If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi‐ tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. 186 Driving and parking # Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil‐ dren. Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the multifunction display. i Neutral h Drive position Engaging reverse gear R Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. # Engaging neutral N Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. # Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i even if the ignition is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Start the vehicle. j Park position k Reverse gear Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the car is stationary. The N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away message appears in the instrument cluster. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch the ignition off. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans‐ mission remains in neutral i. The park position j is automatically re-engaged as soon as one of the following conditions is met: R You switch to transmission position h or k. R You press the j button. # Engaging park position P Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 194). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is stationary. # Driving and parking 187 When the vehicle is stationary, press button j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display. Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R you switch off the ignition when the vehicle is stationary and the transmission is in posi‐ tion h or k. R you open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k. R you switch the engine off and bring the vehi‐ cle to a standstill when the vehicle is rolling and the transmission is in position h or k. # R R you switch off the engine, bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when the vehicle is rolling and the transmission is in position i. engaging park position j automatically is required by the vehicle. % To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while stationary and engage transmission position h or k again. Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐ sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐ cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed Manual gearshifting Permanent setting (vehicles with Offroad package or E-Active Body Control) Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. 188 Driving and parking # To activate/deactivate: pull rocker switch 1. If indicator lamp is lit, manual gearshifting is activated. The current gear is displayed in the multifunction display. Temporary setting To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position h appears in the multifunction display. % To permanently shift the gears manually in drive program = using the steering wheel gearshift paddles, select the p setting for the transmission. # Gearshifting # To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. # To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1. Gearshift recommendation # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. Transmission position p and the cur‐ rent gear appear in the multifunction display. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style. # If gearshift recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear. Using kickdown Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. # Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐ erator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached to protect the engine from overrevving. Driving and parking 189 Glide mode function Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position display h is shown in green. R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ-Boost technology): the com‐ bustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active. Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐ tions are met: R Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: drive pro‐ gram £ is selected. R All other models: drive program ; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R R R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight curves. There is no trailer coupled to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack installed. You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications). % Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =. Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐ ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation Transfer case Function of the transfer case & WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident when in LOW RANGE on slip‐ pery road surfaces The wheels can block and thus lose traction on slippery road surfaces, particularly in the following situations: R if you release the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in motion. R if off-road ABS intervenes when braking. # Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear when driving on slippery road sur‐ faces. & WARNING Risk of accident when the transfer case is in neutral position The vehicle may roll away unintentionally if you do not wait until the transfer case shift operation is complete. 190 Driving and parking # Wait until the transfer case shift opera‐ tion is complete. This function is only available in vehicles with Off-road package. Shift the transfer case to the on-road position HIGH RANGE or into the LOW RANGE off-road gear. Do not switch off the engine during shift opera‐ tion and do not shift the automatic transmission to another position. R R changing the transmission ratio by a factor of about three increased drive torque Shifting the transfer case Shifting to the LOW RANGE off-road gear Do not use LOW RANGE in the following situa‐ tions: R when driving on public roads. Shift ranges HIGH RANGE LOW RANGE Road position for all normal on-road driv‐ ing situations. Off-road gear for driv‐ ing off-road, when fording and on steep uphill or downhill inclines. Properties of the LOW RANGE off-road gear: R reduced maximum permissible speed: 31 mph (50 km/h) R increased tractive power Requirements: R you are not driving on a paved or public road. R the vehicle is stationary. Driving and parking 191 Pull LOW RANGE 1 rocker switch. Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The shift request stays active for a maximum of 30 seconds. If all requirements for shift operation are not fulfilled within this time, indicator lamp 2 switches off again and the shift operation must be started again. # Switch the transmission to position i. If shift operation is successful, the LOW RANGE On message appears in the instru‐ ment cluster, an audible signal sounds and indicator lamp 2 and an indicator lamp in the instrument cluster light up continuously. # Switch the transmission to position h. % The vehicle stays in LOW RANGE if you park the vehicle in LOW RANGE, even after the engine has been restarted. % You will not be able to switch on LOW RANGE if drive program C or B is switched on. The vehicle switches to drive program A. # In the on-road position, shift to HIGH RANGE Requirements: R the engine is running and you are not driving faster than 31 mph (50 km/h). # # # Pull LOW RANGE 1 rocker switch. The shift request stays active for a maximum of 30 seconds. If all requirements for shift operation have not been fulfilled within this time, shift operation must be started again. Switch the transmission to position i. If shift operation is successful, the LOW RANGE Off message appears in the instru‐ ment cluster, an audible signal sounds and the indicator lamps go out. Switch the transmission to position h. Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over‐ ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐ cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. Refueling Refueling the vehicle & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided. 192 Driving and parking # Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ ing. Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. & WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. # To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving and parking 193 * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐ cles with a gasoline engine If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. * NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. If you have added too much fuel because of a defective filling pump, for instance: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked. % Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased. 1 2 3 4 5 Fuel filler flap Bracket for fuel filler cap Tire pressure table QR code for rescue card Fuel type # Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1. Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it. # 194 Driving and parking Insert the fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2. # Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. # Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. # Close fuel filler flap 1. % Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. # Parking Parking the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi‐ cle rolling away If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi‐ ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # # # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving. Apply the parking brake. Switch the transmission to position j. & WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grass‐ land or harvested grain fields. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Driving and parking 195 # Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil‐ dren. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away # Always secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing away. Bring the vehicle to a standstill by applying the brake pedal. # On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving. # Apply the electric parking brake. # Engage transmission position j in a station‐ ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 186). # Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing button 1. # Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the sliding sunroof for approximately five minutes if the driver's door is closed. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel for approx‐ imately five minutes if the driver's door is closed. # Garage door opener Programming buttons for the garage door opener & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. & WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or be struck by the door. 196 Driving and parking # # Always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the door. Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea‐ ture R Doors which conform to the current U.S. safety standards Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on. % The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on. # Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada) Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow. % It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐ cator lamp flashes yellow. # Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. # Point remote control 5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1, 2 or 3. # Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐ uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐ gramming was successful. Additionally, synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure. # Release all of the buttons. Driving and parking 197 % The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. Synchronizing the rolling code Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door. Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds. # Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com‐ pleted. % Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. # Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control 5. # Hold remote control 5 at various angles from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every posi‐ tion for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Note that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends. # Align the antenna line of the door opener unit with the remote control. % Support and additional information on pro‐ gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com/mercedes Opening or closing the garage door Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door. # # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes. If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes. Clearing the garage door opener memory Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted. # 198 Driving and parking Electric parking brake # Electric parking brake function (applying automatically) # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil‐ dren. The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐ mission is in position j and one of the follow‐ ing conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R The transfer case is in the LOW RANGE posi‐ tion. % To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake. In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. R R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐ tionary. Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. This is the case if one of the following conditions is also fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp appears in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Driving and parking 199 Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The engine is running. R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground with the driver's door closed. R If the transmission is in position k, the tail‐ gate must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: R You shift from transmission position j. R You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). When the electric parking brake is released, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying Push handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ tor lamp appears in the instrument cluster. % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu‐ ously. # Releasing Switch on the ignition. # Pull handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. # Emergency braking Press and hold handle 1. As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Can‐ ada) indicator lamp appears in the instru‐ ment cluster. # 200 Driving and parking Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle vehicle is automatically deactivated to facili‐ tate the next engine start. If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit‐ uations: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g. if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key R An impact occurs at low speed R The electric parking brake is not applied The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a twostory garage. Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period % Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti‐ vate the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated. % If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam‐ aged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐ tery's period out of use) Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-oper‐ ation. Standby mode is characterised by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrup‐ ted. R The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not avail‐ able. R The interior motion sensor and tow-away alarm functions are not available. R The function for detecting collisions on a parked vehicle is not available. Driving and parking 201 If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera‐ tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can‐ not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be extended. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby Mode message appears in the media display. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on. Activating/deactivating standby mode (park‐ ing the vehicle for an extended period) Requirements: R The engine is switched off. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. # Select Yes. take into account road, weather or traffic condi‐ tions. Information on vehicle sensors and cameras Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu‐ vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always 1 Cameras in the outside mirrors 2 Multifunction camera 3 Front camera 202 Driving and parking 4 Ultrasonic sensors 5 Rear view camera % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the radiator grill. Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle. Keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 332). The cam‐ eras and sensors must not be covered, for exam‐ ple by bicycle racks, overhanging loads, stickers, foil or foils to protect against stone chipping. Additional license plate brackets can impair the function of the ultrasonic sensors, in particular. In the event of damage or a severe impact in the area of the sensors, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist work‐ shop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras repaired at a qualified specialist 1 2 workshop. If the sensors or cameras are dam‐ aged, some driving systems and driving safety systems may no longer function properly. Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems R R R R R R R R R R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 203) Off-road ABS (/ page 203) BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 203) ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (/ page 203) ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 206) ESP® trailer stabilization (/ page 206) EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) (/ page 207) STEER CONTROL (/ page 207) Active Brake Assist (/ page 207)1 Cruise control (/ page 212) This function includes subfunctions which are only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. This function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) (/ page 214) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 216)1 Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 220)2 Route-based speed adaptation (/ page 221)2 Active Steering Assist (/ page 222)2 Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 224)2 Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 226)2 Active Traffic Jam Assist (/ page 227)2 Hill Start Assist (/ page 227) HOLD function (/ page 228) AIRMATIC (/ page 229) E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (/ page 236) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 244) Rear view camera (/ page 249) Surround view camera (/ page 252) Driving and parking 203 R R R R R Active Parking Assist (/ page 255) ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 261) Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 262)1 Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 264)1 Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 267)3 Function of ABS The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, e.g. at full brake application or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. 1 3 Functions of Off-road ABS % Off-road ABS is activated automatically when you select the F or G drive program. Off-road ABS is specially adapted for driving offroad: R The front wheels lock cyclically during brak‐ ing. R The braking distance is shortened due to the digging-in effect. System limits R Off-road ABS functions at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h). R If Off-road ABS intervenes, the ability to steer may be restricted. Function of BAS The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐ sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Functions of ESP® & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. This function includes subfunctions which are only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. This function includes subfunctions which are only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package or only available depending on the country. 204 Driving and parking Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can monitor and improve driving stability and trac‐ tion in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on a wet or slippery road. R When braking. If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. ESP® ESP® is deactivated if the å OFF warn‐ ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis‐ ted by ESP® when braking. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster, one or several vehicle wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP®. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away. It can be advantageous to deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel. % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu‐ ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 460) R Display messages (/ page 408) ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. If you select the F or G drive program, a special ETS system specifically suited to off-road terrain is automatically activated. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. ESP® modes Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated auto‐ matically. ESP® adapts to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 184). Driving and parking 205 ESP® Comfort active in drive programs A, ; and N R balance between traction and stability R recommended for all road surface conditions R suitable for both dry and difficult road condi‐ tions, such as snow or ice, or when the road is wet from rain R ESP® Sport R active in drive program C R continues to offer stability but with a sporty setup R allows the sporty driver a more active driving style R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road ESP® Sport + R active in drive program B R emphasizes the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics for a more active driving style R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road ESP® off-road and ESP® off-road + R active in drive programs F and G R intervenes later if there is oversteering or understeering, thus improving traction R ESP® off-road (F): suitable for easily negotiable off-road terrain such as dirt tracks, gravel or sandy surfaces R ESP® off-road + (G): suitable for rough terrain such as steep and/or uneven terrain or for driving on rocky terrain Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐ bility Program) (vehicles without Off-road package) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu. Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. # Select ESP. # Select On or å Off. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐ ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐ bility Program) (vehicles with Off-road pack‐ age or E-Active Body Control) Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. 206 Driving and parking Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐ cle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ‐ ual brake application on one side. Function of ESP® trailer stabilization # Pull rocker switch 1. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐ ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. & WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilization cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this. # Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather condi‐ tions. When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabilize your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side: R ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds of 40 mph (65 km/h). R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a tar‐ geted, individual brake application on one side. R In the event of severe swerving, the engine output is also reduced and all wheels are braked. ESP® trailer stabilization may be impaired or may not function if: R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle. Driving and parking 207 Function of EBD Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char‐ acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. Function of STEER CONTROL STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given particu‐ larly in the following situations: R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. R The vehicle starts to skid. System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. R ESP® is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians, or reduce the effects of such a colli‐ sion. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐ sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis‐ tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking applica‐ tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐ tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐ ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max‐ imum full-stop braking if necessary. 208 Driving and parking Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 201). If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display 1 appears in the multifunction display and then automatically goes out after a short time. If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐ tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated. & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ tions. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ essary. Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges: The distance warning function can issue a warn‐ ing in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten‐ sioning of the seat belt. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐ ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this. Driving and parking 209 Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi‐ cles, moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching crossing cyclists Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R R R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching moving pedes‐ trians and cyclists ahead at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists Autonomous braking function (vehicles with‐ out Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 124 mph (200 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes‐ trians and crossing cyclists at speeds up to approximately 31 mph (50 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi‐ cles Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary and 210 Driving and parking moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐ age) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi‐ cles and vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes‐ trians and crossing cyclists Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Activating kickdown. R Releasing the brake pedal. Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐ cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle. Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐ teristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx‐ imately 43 mph (70 km/h). Driving and parking 211 You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering. Cornering function (only vehicles with Driv‐ ing Assistance Package) If a danger of collision from an oncoming vehicle is detected when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 9 mph (15 km/h) before you have left the lane in which you are driving. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva‐ sive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog‐ nize objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ essary. # # End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle. System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐ ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed. R If DSR is active. R R R R R R In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background. If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. On bends with a tight radius. % The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto‐ matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in period. Setting Active Brake Assist Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. 212 Driving and parking Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting. The setting is retained when the engine is next started. Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off. The distance warning function, the autono‐ mous braking function and the Evasive Steer‐ ing Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display. Speed control cruise control Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. Cruise control is operated using the correspond‐ ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maxi‐ mum design speed. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 201). Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: Cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 155 mph (250 km/h). Displays on the multifunction display h (gray): cruise control is selected but not yet activated. R h (green): cruise control is active. R A stored speed appears along with the h dis‐ play. % The segments between the stored speed and the end of the segment display light up in the speedometer. System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐ ing and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐ tions: R In traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Driving and parking 213 R If you are driving when visibility is poor. # Operating cruise control & WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed or Requirements: R R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph (20 km/h). The transmission is in position h. Select J with the left rocker switch. The last stored speed is called up and main‐ tained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. % When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is cleared. Increasing/decreasing the stored speed # 1 mph (1 km/h): press rocker switch 1 up M or down N to the pressure point. or # 5 mph (10 km/h): press rocker switch 1 up M or down N beyond the pressure point. or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch 1 up M. Adopting a detected speed # If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. R Press rocker switch 1 up M or down N. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle. Operating cruise control # Press the rocker switch on the steering wheel control panel up or down to the desired position. Activating cruise control # Select M with the right rocker switch. Activating cruise control 214 Driving and parking # # Activate cruise control or the variable limiter. If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster: select J with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed. Deactivating cruise control Select O with the left rocker switch. # Deactivating cruise control Select N with the right rocker switch. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. # ents, the DSR brakes the vehicle minimally or not at all. When DSR is activated and the transmission is in position h, k or i, DSR controls the driving speed. The target speed can be set to a value between 1 mph (2 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h). By braking or accelerating, you can drive at a higher or lower speed than the target speed at any time. DSR is deactivated automatically if you drive at speeds greater than 28 mph (45 km/h) or select drive program C or B. The î Off mes‐ sage then appears in the multifunction display. The status indicator in the multifunction display disappears. You also hear a warning tone. Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: in drive program DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Function of DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down‐ hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the selected target speed. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR braking effect on the vehi‐ cle. On flat stretches of road and uphill gradi‐ able. , the DSR function is likewise not avail‐ Notes on DSR & WARNING Risk of skidding and accident when DSR is activated on slippery road surfaces If the driven speed and the target speed dif‐ fer, the wheels may lose traction. # Take into account the road surface and the difference between the driving speed and target speed before activat‐ ing DSR. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 201). You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing whether the down‐ hill gradient can be negotiated. Depending on road surface and tires, DSR may not always be able to keep to the target speed. Select a target speed suitable for the environmental conditions and also apply the brakes yourself if required. Driving and parking 215 Activating/deactivating DSR (vehicles with Off-road package or E-Active Body Control) Requirements: R You are driving at 24 mph (40 km/h) or slower. If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Max. Speed 24 mph message appears in the multifunction display. R You have not selected drive program C or B. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐ vated. Activating/deactivating DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) (vehicles without Off-road pack‐ age) Requirements: R You are driving at 24.8 mph (40 km/h) or slower. If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Max. Speed 24 mph message appears in the multifunction display. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐ vated. # # To activate: pull rocker switch 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The î symbol appears in the multifunc‐ tion display. To deactivate: pull rocker switch 1. Indicator lamp 2 and the î symbol go out. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Schnellzugriff (Quick access) # Select î DSR. The î DSRsymbol appears in the multi‐ function display when the function is activa‐ ted. 216 Driving and parking Changing the target speed # To increase/reduce the target speed: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N to the point of resistance. The selected target speed increases or decreases by 1 mph (1 km/h) and appears along with the î symbol in the multifunc‐ tion display. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main‐ tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐ ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 120 mph (200 km/h) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h) % The maximum speed is reduced when driving in LOW RANGE off-road gear (/ page 189). Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel efficient, com‐ fortable or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on freeways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (countrydependent) Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driv‐ ing Assistance Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, sepa‐ rate roadways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehi‐ cle in front, driving off again within 30 seconds. Driving and parking 217 If a critical situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehi‐ cle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 201). Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster Assistant display 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route event (/ page 221) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator 4 Set specified distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis‐ play Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R k (white): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set R k (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected R r: Route-based speed adaptation active (/ page 221). The stored speed is shown along with the per‐ manent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is grayed out. % On freeways or high-speed major roads, the green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli‐ cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away. % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas‐ sive mode. The ç Suspendedmessage appears in the multifunction display. Display on the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom‐ eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments on the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera‐ tions to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed, are displayed in the control feedback of the multi‐ function display on a single line. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If there is swirling dust, e.g. when driving offroad or on sandy surfaces. R The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. 218 Driving and parking R R R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. In parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel‐ erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐ ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐ erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. & WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired # Always carefully observe the traffic con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times. Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐ tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic # & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi‐ cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita‐ ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action. As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in position h. Driving and parking 219 R R R R R The driver's door is closed. Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space. DSR is deactivated. Vehicles with Off-road package: the G drive program is deactivated. # To activate without a stored speed: press rocker switch 1 up M or down N, or select J with the left rocker switch. or To activate with a stored speed: select J with the left rocker switch. # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle. Adopting a detected speed limit # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. # If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster: select J with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed on the traf‐ fic sign is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. # To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the rocker switch on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position. Activating/deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Press the H button. # Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. 220 Driving and parking # Select J with the left rocker switch. or Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being activated when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐ cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. # Select O with the left rocker switch. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Increasing or decreasing the speed # 1 mph (1 km/h): press rocker switch 1 up M or down N to the pressure point. or # 5 mph (10 km/h): press rocker switch 1 up M or down N beyond the pressure point. or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch 1 up M. Changing the specified distance to the vehi‐ cle in front # To reduce the specified distance: press the right rocker switch up (Ñ). # To increase the specified distance: press the right rocker switch down (Ò). Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If speed limit change between 12 mph (20 km/h) and 80 mph (130 km/h) is detected and the automatic adoption of speed limits is active, it will be automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 264). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always upda‐ ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recom‐ mended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recom‐ mended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec‐ ommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐ Driving and parking 221 tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 201). System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 262). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehi‐ cle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R R R # # at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) in wet conditions or in fog when towing a trailer Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations. Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions. Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti‐ vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord‐ ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti‐ ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com‐ fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adaptation can be config‐ ured in the multimedia system (/ page 222). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R T-intersections, roundabouts and toll stations R Turns and exits R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic ) % When the toll station is reached, Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed. Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi‐ cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning off at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, round‐ abouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand‐ still. 222 Driving and parking When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. In difficult conditions, the speed selection made by the system may not always be suitable: R unclear roads R road narrowing R wet road surfaces, snow or ice R when towing a trailer In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc‐ tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol‐ lowing situations: R If the driver does not follow the calcula‐ ted route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations # Adapt the speed to the traffic situation. Setting route-based speed adaptation Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based Speed # Activate or deactivate the function. When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead. % Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 221). Active Steering Assist Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer‐ ence. Driving and parking 223 % Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec‐ essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the center of the lane, for example to form a res‐ cue lane. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case. % Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable. Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter‐ vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 201). Status display of Active Steering Assist in the multifunction display R Ø (gray): activated and passive R Ø (green): activated and active R Ø (red): system limits detected R Ø (white, red hands): "hands on the steer‐ ing wheel" prompt % During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the Ø symbol is shown as gray in the multifunction display. sounds in addition to the visual warning mes‐ sage. If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initi‐ ated (/ page 226). The warning is not issued or is stopped when the driver gives confirmation to the system: R The driver steers the vehicle. R The driver presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control. If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer‐ ing wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐ que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits. 224 Driving and parking The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or intersections. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll stations. R When towing a trailer. R When the tire pressure is too low. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐ tioning If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying atten‐ tion to traffic conditions. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions. Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist Requirements: R R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select a Steering Assist. Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver operates a turn signal indicator. Driving and parking 225 Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 201). Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met: R You are driving on a freeway or road with multiple lanes in the direction of travel. R The neighboring lane is separated by a bro‐ ken lane marking. R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The driven speed is between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in the multimedia system. R Active Steering Assist is activated and active. If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has activated the turn sig‐ nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow next to the ± steering wheel symbol. The Lane Change to the Leftmessage, for example, also appears. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, a gray arrow appears next to the ± steering wheel symbol, which remains green. When the lane change assistance starts, the turn signal indicator is automatically activated along with the display in the multifunction display. If the assistance graphic is shown when chang‐ ing lanes, the lane change display appears with an additional arrow pointing towards the adja‐ cent lane (/ page 216) If a lane change is not possible, the arrow is faded out after a few seconds and a new lane change must be initiated. An immediate lane change is only possible on freeway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be canceled. The Lane Change Canceled message appears in the multifunction dis‐ play. In addition, a warning tone may sound. & WARNING Risk of accident when chang‐ ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users. # Monitor the lane change. & WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func‐ tioning If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar‐ antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torques. # Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. 226 Driving and parking Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary. System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 222). The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty, damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and snow, for example. R The exterior lighting shows a defect. % The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Ø Active Steering Assist symbol when the turn signal indicator is activated. Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Change Assist # Activate or deactivate the function. Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer‐ ing wheel, display 1 appears in the multifunc‐ tion display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver still does not respond to the warn‐ ing, the Beginning Emergency Stop message appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering Driving and parking 227 R R Braking or accelerating Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Traffic Jam Assist Active Traffic Jam Assist helps you when in traf‐ fic jams on multi-lane roads with separate road‐ ways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneu‐ vers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Traffic Jam Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Traffic Jam Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 201). Active Traffic Jam Assist activates automatically when all of the following conditions are met: R You are in a traffic jam on a freeway or highspeed major road. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted and active (/ page 218). R Active Brake Assist is available (/ page 207). R Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 224). R Active Traffic Jam Assist is activated (/ page 227). R You are traveling no faster than 35 mph (60 km/h). The following symbol is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster when the system is active: System limits The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Traffic Jam Assist (/ page 222). Activating/deactivating Active Traffic Jam Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select . Function of Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐ lowing conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal 228 Driving and parking and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist. HOLD function HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐ still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi‐ bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver. System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%. R R Activating/deactivating the HOLD function & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being activated when you leave the vehicle If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. # Always secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing away before you leave it. Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R R R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. The engine is running or has been automati‐ cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function. The electric parking brake is released. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐ vated. The transmission is in position h, k or i. Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal and after a short time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the multifunction display. # Release the brake pedal. Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐ play disappears from the multifunction dis‐ play. Driving and parking 229 The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐ ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. R The transmission is switched to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake. In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a malfunction in the system or the power supply is insufficient. AIRMATIC Function of AIRMATIC Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with an all-round level control system, which also ensures the best possible suspension and con‐ stant ground clearance, even with a laden vehi‐ cle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is low‐ ered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIRMATIC is comprised of the following func‐ tions and components: R All-round air suspension R Speed-dependent lowering R Manually selectable high level setting for greater ground clearance which can be adjusted using a level button R Vehicles with ADS PLUS: also Adaptive Damping System with constant adjustment of damping characteristics for improved driv‐ ing comfort Suspension settings and vehicle level per drive program Drive program A and ;: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R R R The vehicle is set to the normal level. When driving at speeds of approximately 87 mph (140 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. When driving at speeds below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle is raised again. Drive program £ (Mercedes-Maybach vehi‐ cles only): R The suspension setting is very comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R When driving at speeds of approximately 87 mph (140 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle is raised again. Drive program C: R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is lowered to sport level. 230 Driving and parking Drive program B: R The suspension setting is even firmer. R The vehicle is lowered to Sport + level. Drive program F (vehicles without Off-road package) R The suspension setting is suitable for easily negotiable off-road terrain. R The vehicle is set to off-road level +1. R When driving at speeds of approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately 28 mph (45 km/h), the vehicle is raised. Drive program F (vehicles with Off-road package) R The suspension setting is suitable for easily negotiable off-road terrain. R The vehicle is set to off-road level +1. R When driving at speeds of approximately 71 mph (115 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately 47 mph (75 km/h), the vehicle is raised. Differences between different vehicle levels compared to the normal level G (vehicles with Off-road package) R The suspension setting is suitable for difficult off-road terrain. R The vehicle is set to off-road level +1. R When driving at speeds of approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately 28 mph (45 km/h), the vehicle is raised. Vehicle level Vehicles without Offroad package Vehicles with Off-road pack‐ age Car wash approximately +3.5 in (+90 mm) approximately +3.5 in (+90 mm) Off-road level +3 Unavailable approximately +3.5 in (+90 mm) Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program = (/ page 184). Off-road level +2 Unavailable approximately +2.4 in (+60 mm) Driving and parking 231 Vehicle level Vehicles without Offroad package Vehicles with Off-road pack‐ age Off-road level +1 MercedesMaybach vehi‐ cles: approx‐ imately +2.0 in (+50 mm) All other mod‐ els: approx‐ imately +2.4 in (+60 mm) approximately +1.2 in (+30 mm) Sport approximately -0.6 in (-15 mm) approximately -0.6 in (-15 mm) approximately -1.0 in (-25 mm) approximately -1.0 in (-25 mm) Sport + If the entry/exit level function is activated, the vehicle is set to the Sport + level to facilitate entering/exiting the vehicle. When driving at speeds of approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) or above, the entry/exit level is deactivated and the vehicle is raised (/ page 234). Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack If the electrical connection to the trailer or bicy‐ cle rack is established correctly: R Drive program A, ;, £, =, C and B: the vehicle remains at nor‐ mal level irrespective of speed. R Drive program F and G: the vehicle adopts the normal level starting from a speed of 19 mph (30 km/h). System limits AIRMATIC may not be available or have only limi‐ ted availability in the following cases: R The overheating protection has been activa‐ ted due to frequent level changes within a short time. The Á warning lamp appears in the multifunction display. After the cooling phase, the system is again available without restriction. Setting the vehicle level (vehicles with AIR‐ MATIC) & WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high If you drive at a higher vehicle level, the driv‐ ing characteristics may be impaired due to the higher vehicle center of gravity. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Always choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐ cle lowering When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of 232 Driving and parking the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehi‐ cle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. * NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R Vehicles without Off-road package: the vehicle is not moving faster than 40 mph (65 km/h). R Vehicles with Off-road package: Off-road level +1: the vehicle is not mov‐ ing faster than 62 mph (100 km/h). Off-road level +2: the vehicle is not mov‐ ing faster than 40 mph (65 km/h). Off-road level +3: the vehicle is not mov‐ ing faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) and the rear fog lamp is not switched on. Raising the vehicle (vehicles without Offroad package) # Push rocker switch 1 forwards. Indicator lamp 2 flashes while the vehicle is being raised and lights up continuously when it has finished rising. Driving and parking 233 Your selection is saved. The off-road level set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off. The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐ uations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R When driving briefly between 40 mph (65 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). R After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. If the electrical connection to the trailer or bicy‐ cle rack is established correctly: R Up to approximately 18.7 mph (30 km/h): the off-road level +1 can be selected regard‐ less of the drive program. R From approximately 18.7 mph (30 km/h): the vehicle is set to the normal level regard‐ less of the drive program. Raising the vehicle (vehicles with Off-road package) The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. Lowering the vehicle (vehicles without Offroad package) # Pull rocker switch 1. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack # Push rocker switch 1 forwards. Off-road level +1: one indicator lamp 2 lights up continuously when the vehicle has finished rising. R Off-road level +2: two indicator lamps 2 light up continuously when the vehicle has finished rising. R 234 Driving and parking R Off-road level +3: three indicator lamps 2 light up continuously when the vehicle has finished rising. Your selection is saved. The off-road level set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off. The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐ uations: R Off-road level +3: when driving faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) or when the rear fog lamp is switched on. The vehicle is lowered to off-road level +2. R Off-road level +2: When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). When driving briefly between 40 mph (65 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). R The vehicle is lowered to off-road level +1. Off-road level +1: When driving faster than 71 mph (115 km/h). - R When driving briefly between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 71 mph (115 km/h). The vehicle is lowered to the normal level. After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. Lowering the vehicle (vehicles with Off-road package) # Pull rocker switch 1. R Off-road level +3: the vehicle is lowered to off-road level +2. Two indicator lamps 2 light up continuously when the vehicle has finished lowering. R Off-road level +2: the vehicle is lowered to off-road level +1. One indicator lamp 2 lights up continuously when the vehi‐ cle has finished lowering. R Off-road level +1: the vehicle is lowered to the normal level. No indicator lamp 2 lights up when the vehicle has finished lowering. Your selection is saved. The off-road level set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off. Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack If the electrical connection to the trailer or bicy‐ cle rack is established correctly: R Up to approximately 12 mph (20 km/h): offroad levels +1, +2 and +3 can be selected regardless of the drive program. R Up to approximately 19 mph (30 km/h): offroad levels +1 and +2 can be selected regardless of the drive program. R From approximately 19 mph (30 km/h): the vehicle is set to the normal level regardless of the drive program. Setting the entering/exiting level (AIRMATIC) Requirements: R The engine is running. R The vehicle is moving at speeds less than 20 mph (30 km/h). Driving and parking 235 Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Schnellzugriff (Quick access) # Select Lower When Getting In On. The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 to facili‐ tate entering and exiting. % The availability of this function depends on the vehicle equipment. % Further information on AIRMATIC (/ page 229). Lowering and raising the rear of the vehicle & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐ cle lowering When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. Requirements: R All vehicle doors are closed R There is no trailer coupled R There is no bicycle rack installed R The battery is sufficiently charged; if neces‐ sary, start the engine Lowering the rear of the vehicle Apply the electric parking brake. Shift the transmission to position j (/ page 186). # Pull switch 1 in the right-hand cargo com‐ partment trim briefly. Indicator lamp 2 flashes until the vehicle has been lowered. The vehicle is lowered at the rear axle by approx. 1.5 in (40 mm). When the vehicle has been lowered, indicator lamp 2 remains lit. When the rear of the vehicle has been com‐ pletely lowered, indicator lamp 2 remains lit. Lowering is interrupted in the following situa‐ tions: R A vehicle door is opened R Switch 1 is pulled again R The vehicle is being driven faster than 1.2 mph (2 km/h). # # % The vehicle is automatically set to the level of the most recently selected drive program if you drive at speeds greater than 1.2 mph (2 km/h). 236 Driving and parking If indicator lamp 2 flashes twice and the rear of the vehicle does not lower: # Make sure that the requirements are met. % Lowering the rear of the vehicle allows the vehicle to be loaded more easily. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle when doing this (/ page 119). Raising the rear of the vehicle Check if the battery is sufficiently charged. If necessary, start the engine. # Pull switch 1 briefly. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle will be raised to the currently selected level. % The vehicle is automatically set to the level of the most recently selected drive program if you drive at speeds greater than 1.2 mph (2 km/h). If the vehicle cannot be raised: # Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged; if necessary, start the engine. The raising process continues. # E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Function of E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is an electrohydraulic suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible sus‐ pension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driv‐ ing safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The suspension setting is adjusted depending on the road surface, vehicle load and the drive program selected. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function detects areas of unevenness in the road before you drive over them by means of a multifunction camera. This reduces chassis movements. The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on the following factors: R Driving style, e.g. sporty R Road condition, e.g. bumps R Drive program E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is comprised of the following functions and components: R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: ROAD SURFACE SCAN R Curve inclination function CURVE R Recovery mode R Individual wheel control R Air suspension with automatic level control R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption R Manual level adjustment R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant adjustment of damping characteris‐ tics) R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button. Suspension settings and vehicle level per drive program Drive program C R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to Sport level. R ROAD SURFACE SCAN is deactivated. Driving and parking 237 R The curve inclination function is deactivated. Drive program B R The suspension setting is even firmer. R The vehicle is set to Sport + level. R ROAD SURFACE SCAN is deactivated. R The curve inclination function is active. Drive program A The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R When driving at speeds of approximately 87 mph (140 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle is raised. R ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active. R The curve inclination function is deactivated. R Drive program £ R The suspension setting is very comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R R R R When driving at speeds of approximately 87 mph (140 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. When driving at speeds below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle is raised. ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active. The curve inclination function is active. Drive program N The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R When driving at speeds of approximately 87 mph (140 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle is raised again. R ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active. R The curve inclination function is active. R Drive program ; R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R R R R When driving at speeds of approximately 87 mph (140 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. When driving at speeds below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle is raised again. ROAD SURFACE SCAN is deactivated. The curve inclination function is deactivated. Drive program F R The suspension setting is suitable for easily negotiable off-road terrain. R The vehicle is set to off-road level +1. R ROAD SURFACE SCAN is deactivated. R The curve inclination function is deactivated. R Recovery mode or individual wheel control can be activated. R Vehicles without Off-road package: When driving at speeds of approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. 238 Driving and parking When driving at speeds below approx‐ imately 28 mph (45 km/h), the vehicle is raised. Vehicles with Off-road package: When driving at speeds of approximately 71 mph (115 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. When driving at speeds below approx‐ imately 47 mph (75 km/h), the vehicle is raised. - R Drive program G R The suspension setting is suitable for difficult off-road terrain. R The vehicle is set to off-road level +1. R When driving at speeds of approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately 28 mph (45 km/h), the vehicle is raised. R ROAD SURFACE SCAN is deactivated. R The curve inclination function is deactivated. R Recovery mode or individual wheel control can be activated. Drive program = R You can call up individual suspension set‐ tings here. Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack If the electrical connection to the trailer or bicy‐ cle rack is established correctly: R Drive program A, ;, £, N, =, C and B: the vehicle remains at normal level irrespective of speed. R The curve inclination function is deactivated. R Drive program F and G: the vehicle adopts the normal level starting from a speed of 19 mph (30 km/h). Level differences compared to the normal level Vehicle level Vehicles without Offroad package Vehicles with Off-road pack‐ age Car wash approximately +3.5 in (+90 mm) approximately +3.5 in (+90 mm) Off-road level +3 Unavailable approximately +3.5 in (+90 mm) Off-road level +2 Unavailable approximately +2.4 in (+60 mm) Driving and parking 239 Vehicle level Vehicles without Offroad package Vehicles with Off-road pack‐ age Off-road level +1 MercedesMaybach vehi‐ cles: approx‐ imately +2.0 in (+50 mm) All other mod‐ els: approx‐ imately +2.4 in (+60 mm) approximately +1.2 in (+30 mm) Sport approximately -0.6 in (-15 mm) approximately -0.6 in (-15 mm) Sport + approximately -1.0 in (-25 mm) approximately -1.0 in (-25 mm) Function of ROAD SURFACE SCAN % This function is not available in all countries. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors the road in front of your vehicle using multifunction camera (/ page 201). ROAD SURFACE SCAN detects unevenness in the road surface, e.g. bumps, before the vehicle drives over them. Chassis movements are reduced and driving comfort is increased. ROAD SURFACE SCAN is automatically activated if the following conditions are met: R The drive program A or N is selected. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R You are driving at a speed between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). System limits ROAD SURFACE SCAN can be impaired in the following situations or can stop functioning: R If the road is insufficiently lit, e.g. at night. R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the windshield in the area of multifunction camera 1 is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R R R R If the road surface has no optic structure or reflects light. If you are driving too close to the vehicle in front. If sections of the route have a very small radius of curvature. During abrupt driving maneuvers, e.g. heavy braking or sudden acceleration. Observe the notes on cleaning the multifunction camera (/ page 332). Function of recovery mode & WARNING Risk of injury due to the vehi‐ cle moving up and down During recovery mode, the vehicle moves up and down and can cause injuries. # When activating recovery mode, make certain that no one is in the vicinity of the vehicle. 240 Driving and parking * NOTE Risk of damage due to the vehicle moving up and down When free driving mode is activated, the vehicle moves up and down. Vehicle parts may be damaged if the underbody bottoms out. # Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance when rocking free mode is activated. Recovery mode is a function of the suspension which can assist the driver on loose surfaces (e.g. sand, snow) when freeing a vehicle which has become stuck. The vehicle body rocks in slow, vertical motions when recovery mode has been activated. This temporarily puts the wheels under greater load, which means they have increased traction and the vehicle is freed. You can activate free driving mode via Off-road Assist (/ page 243). Function of individual wheel control & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering The vehicle can be lowered when the individ‐ ual wheel control function has been activa‐ ted. Body parts could become trapped if they are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure that nobody is under the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when individual wheel control is activated. * NOTE Risk of damage due to the vehicle moving up and down The vehicle can be lowered or raised on one or more wheels when the individual wheel control function has been activated. Vehicle parts could be damaged due to contact with objects. # Make sure that the vehicle has suffi‐ cient room to move when the individual wheel control function has been activa‐ ted. Individual wheel control is a function of the sus‐ pension, which can be used to set the vehicle level for each wheel individually. This can help to improve alignment of the body when driving offroad. You can activate individual wheel control via Offroad Assist (/ page 243). Adjusting the vehicle level (vehicles with EACTIVE BODY CONTROL) & WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. Driving and parking 241 & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐ cle lowering When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehi‐ cle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. Raising the vehicle (vehicles without Offroad package) Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R Vehicles without Off-road package: the vehicle is being driven no faster than 40 mph (65 km/h). R Vehicles with Off-road package: Off-road level +1: the vehicle is not mov‐ ing faster than 62 mph (100 km/h). Off-road level +2: the vehicle is not mov‐ ing faster than 40 mph (65 km/h). Off-road level +3: the vehicle is not mov‐ ing faster than 12 mph (20 km/h). # Push rocker switch 1 forwards. Indicator lamp 2 flashes while the vehicle is being raised and lights up continuously when it has finished rising. 242 Driving and parking Your selection is saved. The off-road level set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off. The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐ uations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R When driving briefly between 40 mph (65 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). R After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. If the electrical connection to the trailer or bicy‐ cle rack is established correctly: R Up to approximately 18.7 mph (30 km/h): the off-road level +1 can be selected regard‐ less of the drive program. R From approximately 18.7 mph (30 km/h): the vehicle is set to the normal level regard‐ less of the drive program. Raising the vehicle (vehicles with Off-road package) The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. Lowering the vehicle (vehicles without Offroad package) # Pull rocker switch 1. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack # Push rocker switch 1 forwards. Off-road level +1: one indicator lamp 2 lights up continuously when the vehicle has finished rising. R Off-road level +2: two indicator lamps 2 light up continuously when the vehicle has finished rising. R Driving and parking 243 R Off-road level +3: three indicator lamps 2 light up continuously when the vehicle has finished rising. Your selection is saved. The off-road level set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off. The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐ uations: R Off-road level +3: when driving faster than 12 mph (20 km/h). The vehicle is lowered to off-road level +2. R Off-road level +2: When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). When driving briefly between 40 mph (65 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). R The vehicle is lowered to off-road level +1. Off-road level +1: When driving faster than 71 mph (115 km/h). - R When driving briefly between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 71 mph (115 km/h). The vehicle is lowered to the normal level. After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack If the electrical connection to the trailer or bicy‐ cle rack is established correctly: R Up to approximately 12 mph (20 km/h): offroad levels +1, +2 and +3 can be selected regardless of the drive program. R Up to approximately 19 mph (30 km/h): offroad levels +1 and +2 can be selected regardless of the drive program. R From approximately 19 mph (30 km/h): the vehicle is set to the normal level regardless of the drive program. Lowering the vehicle (vehicles with Off-road package) # Pull rocker switch 1. R Off-road level +3: the vehicle is lowered to off-road level +2. Two indicator lamps 2 light up continuously when the vehicle has finished lowering. R Off-road level +2: the vehicle is lowered to off-road level +1. One indicator lamp 2 lights up continuously when the vehi‐ cle has finished lowering. R Off-road level +1: the vehicle is lowered to the normal level. No indicator lamp 2 lights up when the vehicle has finished lowering. Your selection is saved. The off-road level set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off. Setting Off-road Assist Requirements: R the vehicle is stationary R the vehicle is set to off-road level 1 or 2 244 Driving and parking R R R R R R R R R the Off-road or Off-road Plus (only vehicles with Off-road package) drive program has been selected the ignition is switched on all doors and the hood are closed the transmission is not engaged in position j there is no trailer coupled the vehicle is outdoors the detected lateral inclination of the vehicle must not exceed approx. 15° the system is within its operating tempera‐ ture the on-board voltage is sufficiently high Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Offroad Assistant 5 Assistance Recovery mode Recovery mode assists the driver when pulling away on rough terrain, such as sand or snow. # Select Recovery Mode. Select Start. Recovery mode is activated. # Select Stop to stop recovery mode. Recovery mode is automatically deactivated in the following situations: R you are actually traveling faster than 9 mph (15 km/h) R after a running time of 30 seconds R it is detected that an object has hit the underbody of the vehicle hard R not all conditions are met # % Further information on recovery mode (/ page 239). Individual wheel control Individual wheel control enables the vehicle level to be set separately for each wheel. # Select Individual Wheel Ctrl.. # Set the vehicle level for the desired wheel. % You can also use the touch display to set the level for two or more wheels at the same time. Select Reset to set all wheels to the default setting. Individual wheel control is automatically deacti‐ vated in the following situations: R you are traveling faster than 9 mph (15 km/h) R it is detected that an object has hit the underbody of the vehicle hard R not all conditions are met # % Further information on individual wheel con‐ trol (/ page 240). Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using mul‐ tiple sensors on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Driving and parking 245 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐ roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐ ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle in front and approx‐ imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) to an obstacle behind. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m). Using the Warn Early All Around setting in the multimedia sys‐ tem, the warning tones for front and side impact protection can be set to sound at a greater dis‐ tance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides (/ page 249). % The Warn Early All Around setting is always active at the rear of the vehicle. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Active Parking Assist is unavailable. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a sur‐ round view camera Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a surround view camera If Active Parking Assist is deactivated and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds below 6 mph (10 km/h). The color of the individual segments of the warn‐ ing display is based on the distance to the detec‐ ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) 246 Driving and parking R R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the Head-up Display Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front 2 and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides 3 can also be displayed in the Headup Display. System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐ rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks. The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, especially after driv‐ ing off-road, taking care not to scratch or dam‐ age them. Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Example: vehicles with surround view camera When rear segments 1 or all-round segments 2 light up red and the é symbol appears in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location. Driving and parking 247 If a warning tone also sounds for approximately two seconds every time the vehicle is started, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 332). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Function of the passive side impact protec‐ tion Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec‐ tion range. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it. During the parking procedure or when maneu‐ vering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued and the segments light up in color in the display. The segment color changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Yellow: approximately 1.0 - 2.0 ft (30 - 60 cm) R Red: less than approximately 1.0 ft (30 cm) In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis‐ played. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles without a surround view camera 1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow) and rear (red) 248 Driving and parking System limits The system limits for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact pro‐ tection. The following objects are not detected, for exam‐ ple: R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from the side R Objects placed next to the vehicle Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles with a surround view camera 1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacles detected at the front right (red) Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐ tion. R You open the doors. After the engine is restarted, obstacles on the sides must be detected again before a new warning can be issued. Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC * NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi‐ cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth‐ erwise be damaged. Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. % Make sure that there are no persons, ani‐ mals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. # Tap é in the media display. % If the é symbol is shown in the multifunc‐ tion display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu. Driving and parking 249 Adjusting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Set a value. Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. # Set a value. Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta‐ cle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Activate or deactivate the function. Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate or deactivate the function. Reversing camera Function of the rear view camera When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is shown in the media dis‐ play. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park‐ ing. % You can open the cover of the rear view cam‐ era manually (/ page 255). The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances dis‐ played only apply to road level. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view R Trailer view The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: 250 Driving and parking 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch Vehicles with Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: Normal view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ 2 3 4 5 face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐ imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) Bumper Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area Wide-angle view Normal view 1 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) Driving and parking 251 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ 3 4 5 6 face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less) Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis‐ tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m)) 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch System failure If the rear view camera is not operational, the following display appears in the multimedia sys‐ tem. Wide-angle view Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid System limits The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The tailgate is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty 252 Driving and parking or covered. Observe the information on vehi‐ cle sensors and cameras (/ page 201). % Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situation. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. % The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. 360° camera Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con‐ sists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you, e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibility. The views of the surround view camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing up. The surround view camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surround‐ ings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park‐ ing. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors % You can open the cover of the rear view cam‐ era manually (/ page 255). Views of the surround view camera You can select from different views: 1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the rear view cam‐ era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) Driving and parking 253 Top view R R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less Guide lines When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in gray. 1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will The color of the individual segments of warning display 2 is based on the distance to the detec‐ ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) % When Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings 1 are displayed in green. take at the current steering wheel angle 2 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 3 Your vehicle from above take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area 4 Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) 254 Driving and parking The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch. Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears: When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view. This view supports maneuvering procedures with a trailer. Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view. 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch 1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out 2 Marker of the wheel contact points System failure If the system is not ready for operation, the fol‐ lowing message appears in the media display: Driving and parking 255 System limits The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situa‐ tions: R The doors are open. R The outside mirrors are folded in. R The tailgate is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehi‐ cle sensors and cameras (/ page 201). % Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. % The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera (/ page 332). Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after an ignition cycle. Selecting a view for the surround view cam‐ era # Shift to reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 252). # If, after shifting to reverse gear, the image of the rear view camera is not shown: switch off the ignition, press and hold the c button, switch on the ignition and engage reverse gear again. Active Parking Assist Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system that automatically searches for and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle when traveling forwards up to approx. 22 mph (35 km/h). Active Parking Assist provides assistance when changing gear, accelerating, braking and steer‐ ing the vehicle. If all requirements are met, the Ç display appears in the multifunction display. The system then independently locates and measures paral‐ 256 Driving and parking lel and perpendicular parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the È display appears in the multi‐ function display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display. The parking space and, if necessary, the parking direction can be selected as desired. Active Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path, switches on the turn signal indicator and assists you in parking and exiting the parking space. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. If one of the following actions is carried out, Active Parking Assist is canceled: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake. R R R You engage transmission position j. ESP® intervenes. You open the doors or the tailgate while driv‐ ing. System limits Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calcu‐ lating the parking procedure. In some circum‐ stances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This could cause a collision. In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. # Extreme environmental conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. R When snow chains are installed. R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached. Driving and parking 257 R R R R Directly after a tire change or when spare tires are installed. If the tire pressure is too low or too high. If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a curb. On steep inclines of more than approx. 15%. Parking with Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as, e.g.: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. # Press button 1. The media display shows the view of Active Park‐ ing Assist. Area 2 displays detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path 3. % Vehicle path 3 shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi‐ cle. # Select desired parking space 4 and con‐ firm. # If necessary, select the parking direction: for‐ wards or reverse, and confirm. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on selected parking space 4 and the parking direction. 258 Driving and parking % The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐ matically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐ tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐ tor accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. # If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi‐ tion. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. % During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are dis‐ played in green in the camera image. On completion of the parking procedure, the Ø Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle display message appears. Further maneuvering may still be necessary. # After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb. % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro‐ cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa‐ ble, the system can change the transmission position again or cancel the parking proce‐ dure. Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. Please note that you are responsible for the vehi‐ cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle. Driving and parking 259 & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space # # Press button 1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist. If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: in area 2, select direction of travel 3 Left or Right. % The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path. # Confirm direction of exit 3 to drive out of the parking space. % The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐ matically when the exiting procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐ tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐ tor accordingly. While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. # If, for example, the Please Engage Forward Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi‐ tion. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched off auto‐ matically. After the parking space has been exited, a warn‐ ing tone and the Ø Parking Assist Finished, 260 Driving and parking Take Control of Vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not automatically braked and can roll away. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again. Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the É symbol appears in the media display. % You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away Assist at any time by pressing the é button. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐ tify objects and traffic situations. # # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐ essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva‐ sive action. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐ stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit‐ uations, for example: R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals. R If an incorrect transmission position is engaged. Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R R R If you shift the transmission position to k or h when the vehicle is stationary. If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. If the maneuvering assistant function is acti‐ vated in the multimedia system. System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is not available. % Also observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 244). Function of Cross Traffic Alert % Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 264). Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist: Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any crossing traffic when backing up and maneuvering out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation Driving and parking 261 is detected, the L symbol appears in the media display. If the driver does not respond to the warning, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automatically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following conditions: R If the vehicle is backing up at walking pace. R If the maneuvering assistant function is acti‐ vated in the multimedia system. System limits Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines. Cross Traffic Alert is not available when driving with a trailer. Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis‐ tance Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Switch Maneuvering Assistance on or off. % Maneuvering assistance must be active for the function of Drive Away Assist (/ page 260). ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐ nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati‐ gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐ ted accordingly. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐ tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis‐ play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last break. 262 Driving and parking R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST: the fuller the circle, the higher the atten‐ tional level determined as your attention wanes, the circle in the center of the display becomes smaller If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐ tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐ ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all in the following situations: R If you have been driving for less than approx‐ imately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐ nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. R If the time has been set incorrectly. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre‐ quently In active driving situations. The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐ tinuing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. changing drivers or taking a break). Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist Setting options Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. # Suggesting a rest area Select Suggest Rest Area. # Activate or deactivate the function. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity. # Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area. # Traffic Sign Assist Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 201). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the instrument cluster Driving and parking 263 and optionally in the Head-up Display or central display. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 201). Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs: R When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. free‐ way entry or exit road. R When a village or city boundary which is stored in the digital map is passed. can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You Display in the Instrument Display % Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis‐ play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the Head-up Display. If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the cur‐ rent maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display: This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup‐ ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes‐ sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 408). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. 264 Driving and parking R R R R R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, because they are covered, or due to insufficient lighting. If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. If you turn sharply, when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision. Setting Traffic Sign Assist Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Traffic Sign Assist # 5 Assistance Activating or deactivating automatic adop‐ tion of speed limits (only vehicles with Driv‐ ing Assistance Package) # Select Limit Adoption. # Activate or deactivate the function. The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. % If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter Further information (/ page 218). Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display # Select Display in Central Display. Activate or deactivate the function. Adjusting the type of warning Select Visual & Audible, Visual or Off. # Adjusting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set the desired speed. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐ imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse‐ quently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. Driving and parking 265 Permanent status display in the instrument clus‐ ter: R ¸ (gray): system is activated but inopera‐ tive R ¸ (green): system is activated and opera‐ tional If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the cor‐ responding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ tance at the side of the vehicle. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 201). Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu‐ pants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary. & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear‐ ance. If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warn‐ ing is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the igni‐ tion off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi‐ tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi‐ cle occupants. 266 Driving and parking System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is suffi‐ cient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along‐ side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro‐ longed time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehi‐ cle and the electrical connection has been cor‐ rectly established. The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces R when people approach the vehicle R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects & WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐ self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a coursecorrecting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐ recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa‐ ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h). If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐ Driving and parking 267 ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐ play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐ priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognize the dan‐ gers (/ page 264). Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist. R R R ESP® is deactivated. A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is detected. You are driving with a trailer and the electri‐ cal connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established. Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist. Active Lane Keeping Assist Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc‐ tion camera (/ page 201). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correct‐ ing brake application back into your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is dis‐ played in the on-board computer: R à (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active and operating. R à (gray): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active but not operating. R ·: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiva‐ ted or there is a malfunction. 268 Driving and parking R If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis‐ play 1 appears in the multifunction display. The system does not intervene if you activate the turn signal indicator. If the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will intervene regardless of the turn sig‐ nal indicator. If you leave the lane without using the turn sig‐ nal indicator but an obstacle is detected in your lane, the system will not intervene. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. A front wheel drives over this lane marking. Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assis‐ tance Package) Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continu‐ ous lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) R A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel. R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle, an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving par‐ allel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. System limits No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐ erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐ eration. R When ESP® is deactivated. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con‐ nection to the trailer has been correctly established. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed. If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane correcting brake application takes place (/ page 269). Driving and parking 269 The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov‐ ered. R If the distance from the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place. Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Activate or deactivate the function. Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting the sensitivity % The availability of this function is dependent on the country. # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Activating or deactivating the haptic warning Select Warning. Activate or deactivate the function. # Trailer hitch Notes on trailer operation Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable ball neck If you install an unsuitable ball neck, this may result in the trailer hitch and rear axle being overloaded. As a consequence, the handling characteris‐ tics may be heavily impaired and the trailer could become detached. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Only install a ball neck that conforms to the permitted dimensions and has been 270 Driving and parking # designed for the requirements of trailer operation. Do not change the ball neck or the trailer hitch. The values approved by the manufacturer can be found on the identification plates and in the "Technical data" section under "Trailer hitch" for the towing vehicle (/ page 406). & WARNING Swerving of the vehicle/ trailer combination due to increased speed You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer combination. The vehicle/trailer combination may even tip over. # Under no circumstances should you try to straighten the vehicle/trailer combi‐ nation by increasing the speed. # Reduce your speed and do not counter‐ steer. # If necessary, apply the brakes. * NOTE Damage to the engine as a result of overheating # If you retrofit a trailer hitch, modifica‐ tions to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. When retrofitting a trailer hitch, observe the fastening points on the chassis. Retrofitting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a trailer load is specified in your vehicle docu‐ ments. If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved for trailer operation. Further information can be obtained at a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. If the trailer coupling is detachable, it is essen‐ tial to comply with the operating instructions of the trailer coupling manufacturer. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not connect the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer may become detached. Observe the following notes on the tongue weight: R Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible tongue weight R Use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight Do not exceed the following values: Permissible towing capacity R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi‐ cle R Permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle R Permissible gross mass of the trailer R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer R Ensure the following before starting a journey: R The tire pressure on the rear axle of the tow‐ ing vehicle is set for a maximum load R The lighting of the connected trailer is opera‐ tional In the event of increased rear axle load, the vehi‐ cle/trailer combination may not exceed a maxi‐ mum speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) for reasons Driving and parking 271 concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is above 62 mph (100 km/h). Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: if the socket of the trailer hitch is occupied, e.g. by a trailer or rear bicycle rack, the vehicle is set to the normal level regardless of the drive program at speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h). Attaching the ball neck & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to an incorrectly installed ball cou‐ pling If the ball coupling is not installed and engaged correctly, it may become detached during travel and endanger other road users. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Install and secure the ball coupling as described in the ball coupling manufac‐ turer's installation instructions. # When the ball coupling has been instal‐ led, ensure that it is correctly secured before every trip. Attaching the ball neck & WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly installed and secured ball coupling If the ball coupling has not been correctly installed and secured, the trailer can become detached. # Install and secure the ball coupling as described in the ball coupling manufac‐ turer's installation instructions. # When the ball coupling has been instal‐ led, ensure that it is correctly secured before every trip. Requirements: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. # # # Remove cover 1 from the ball neck mount in the direction of the arrow. Store cover 1 so that it cannot move around. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. 272 Driving and parking Coupling or uncoupling a trailer & WARNING Risk of injury from the vehicle level being changed Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. You may become trap‐ ped if you couple up or uncouple a trailer while the vehicle level is changing. In addi‐ tion, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. When coupling up or uncoupling a trailer, make sure that: # The doors or tailgate are not opened or closed. # You do not initiate the level control sys‐ tem and do not operate the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. # Do not lock or unlock the vehicle. Requirements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake. R The transmission is in position j. The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi‐ cle only if the following conditions are met: R The trailer is connected correctly. R The trailer lighting system is in working order. The functions of the following systems will be affected by a correctly connected trailer: R Active Lane Keeping Assist R ESP® trailer stabilization R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC R Active Parking Assist R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist R Drive Away Assist R Cross Traffic Alert R Rear view camera R Surround view camera R AIR BODY CONTROL R AIRMATIC R E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Vehicles without level control: the ball head height will change depending on the vehicle's load. In this case, use a trailer with a heightadjustable drawbar. Coupling up a trailer * NOTE Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery. # Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer battery. Information about a suitable ball neck for Mercedes-Benz vehicles can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. # Remove the cover cap from the ball neck mount and store it in a safe place (/ page 271). # Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle. Driving and parking 273 Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. % Accessories can be connected to the perma‐ nent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the igni‐ tion lock. # Uncoupling a trailer & WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. # Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake. # & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable Vehicles with level control system: The vehicle may lower when the trailer cable is disconnected. This could result in you or other people becoming trapped if your or their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure that nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you discon‐ nect the trailer cable. # * NOTE Damage when uncoupling in a state of overrun Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damage the vehicle. Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake. # # Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. Uncouple the trailer. Place the cover cap on the ball neck mount. Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys‐ tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per‐ mitted towing methods (/ page 349) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 350). 274 Instrument Display and on-board computer Notes on the Instrument Display and onboard computer & WARNING Risk of accident due to an Instrument Display malfunction If the Instrument Display has failed or mal‐ functioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display mes‐ sages and warnings from specific systems on the multifunction display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. You could other‐ wise fail to recognize dangers. Instrument Display and on-board computer 275 Instrument Display overview 1 Display content on left (example: speedome‐ ter): speedometer/time /date/trip com‐ puter From Start and From Reset/range/ audio/angle of incline and approach/depar‐ ture The segments on the speedometer indicate the status of the following systems: cruise 2 3 4 5 control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Outside temperature Digital speedometer Time Display content on right (example: tachome‐ ter): tachometer/average fuel consumption/ECO display/navigation/G- meter/assistant display/4MATIC/suspen‐ sion (equipment-dependent) The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the tach‐ ometer (overrevving range) is reached. 6 Index points These show the selected display or menu content. 276 Instrument Display and on-board computer 7 Coolant temperature display 8 9 A B The coolant temperature display is permitted to rise to 248°F during normal operation. Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ tem: POWER and CHARGE display (electrical drive support and recuperation power of the electric motor) Selected drive program Selected transmission position Multifunction display (example: standard dis‐ play for trip): Assistance/Telephone/Naviga‐ tion/Trip/Media/Radio/Styles and dis‐ plays/Service Fuel level, fuel filler flap location indicator, range Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel 4 Control panel for MBUX multimedia system: 5 6 7 8 1 P Back/Home button, on-board com‐ puter Press and hold: shows standard display 2 Touch Control, on-board computer 3 Control panel for cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC £ Voice Control System ß Displays favorites VOL: control knob, adjusts the volume or switches the sound off 8 (press) 6 Makes/accepts a call ~ Rejects/ends a call ò Calls up the home screen Touch Control multimedia system G Back button Brightness control to adjust the lighting in the Instrument Display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat‐ ing the on-board computer. Instrument Display and on-board computer 277 R R R The on-board computer is operated using the left-hand Touch Control and the left-hand back/ home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. The following menus are available: R Assistance R Phone R Navigation R Trip R Radio Media Designs & Disp. Service % You can find information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual. # To call up the menu bar: briefly press the left-hand back button until the menu bar is displayed. % Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer. # To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. # To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or confirm a selec‐ tion or setting: press the left-hand Touch Control. # To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a func‐ tion, an entry or a display: swipe upwards # or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐ trol. To exit a submenu: press the left-hand back button. Selecting the Head-up Display To switch on the Head-up Display: switch on the Head-up Display via the multimedia system or activate it in the menu bar by swip‐ ing upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. The Head-up Display menu has been selec‐ ted on the Head-up Display. # To switch to the Head-up Display: press the left-hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To select what the Head-up Display shows: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Full-screen menus You can display the following menus in full on the Instrument Display: R Assistance R Trip 278 Instrument Display and on-board computer R Navigation # On the corresponding menu, use the lefthand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list. Press the left-hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed in full. # Overview of what is shown on the multi‐ function display Also shown on the multifunction display: u Active Parking Assist (/ page 257) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactiva‐ ted (/ page 248) î DSR (/ page 214) h Cruise control (/ page 212) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 216) ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 207) à Active Steering Assist (/ page 222) Active Traffic Jam Assist (/ page 227) à ± è ë _ Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 267) Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 224) ECO start/stop function (/ page 179) HOLD function (/ page 228) Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 146) Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 262). For an overview of the indicator and warning lamps, see (/ page 460). Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display The Head-up Display projects the following infor‐ mation above the cockpit into the driver's field of vision: R Driving speed R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driving systems and driving safety systems R Some warning messages Depending on the vehicle's equipment, different content can be shown in the three display areas of the Head-up Display (/ page 279). Instrument Display and on-board computer 279 Display content R R R Wet road Objects on the display cover Polarization in sunglasses % In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the Head-up Display off and on again. 1 2 3 4 Navigation instructions Current speed Detected instructions and traffic signs Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control) System limits The visibility of the displays will be affected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light R Voice Control System # To choose a setting: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control. Settings menu 5 will be selected. To call up the Settings menu: press the left-hand Touch Control. To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. To set messages, assistance status, tele‐ phone, audio and the Voice Control Sys‐ tem: press the left-hand Touch Control. The list of setting options will be displayed. Swipe upwards or downwards on the lefthand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the left-hand Touch Control. # # Setting the Head-up Display using the onboard computer # On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following Head-up Display settings can be selected: R Position R Brightness R Displays R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio # # 280 Instrument Display and on-board computer Selecting what the Head-up Display shows 4 Right display area Traffic Sign Assist vehicle level Differential Assistant display 5 To adjust the position, brightness and lower display area 6 Index points 7 Lower display area (Example) 1 Switches the Head-up Display on/off 2 Left display area Navigation system Inclination, gradient and compass Average consumption G-meter 3 Central display area Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning Display areas 2 to 4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name or track will be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the tele‐ phone list on the Instrument Display is actively operated. # To select a display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. Switching the Head-up Display on/off via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select HUD. The Head-up Display is activated. MBUX multimedia system 281 Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system Overview of the MBUX multimedia system & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Press briefly: switches the mute function on/off Press and hold: switches the multimedia sys‐ tem or media display on or off 5 Buttons for navigation, radio/media and telephone 6 Buttons for vehicle functions/system set‐ tings and favorites/themes Further operating options: Conducting a voice dialog with the Voice Control System. R Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant. R 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system 2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Touchpad 4 Controller Turning: adjusts the volume % You can find further information about oper‐ ation as well as about applications and serv‐ ices in the Digital Operator's Manual. Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 282 MBUX multimedia system Home screen overview 1 Depending on the display, calls up the first three applications or the home screen 2 Calls up the profile 3 Calls up the global search 4 SOS NOT READY (only when the MercedesBenz emergency call system is not available) 5 Signal strength of the mobile phone network, 6 7 8 9 network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time Calls up the Notifications Center Calls up an application using the symbol Application and current information Quick-access, e.g. enter home address A Index points and selected display area B Calls up the air conditioning menu C Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and FAVORITES MBUX multimedia system 283 Operating the MBUX multimedia system ß Pressing the rocker switch down and holding: adds favorites and themes VOL: control adjusts the volume or switches the sound off 8 (press) 6 Pressing the rocker switch up: makes or accepts a call ~ Pressing the rocker switch down: rejects or ends a call Using Touch Control # # To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears. Using the touchpad Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control 2 with single-finger swipes. # To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Using the touchscreen Select menu options, symbols or characters by pressing briefly. # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right. # To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. # 1 © Calls up the home screen 2 Touch Control 3 G Pressing briefly: returns to the previ‐ ous display 4 ß Pressing the rocker switch down briefly: shows favorites 1 G Returns to the previous display 2 ~ Calls up the audio control menu 284 MBUX multimedia system Swiping to the left of right: selects the previ‐ ous or next radio station/music track 3 © Calls up the home screen 4 Touchpad # # # # To select a menu option: swipe and press. To use handwriting recognition: write a character on the touchpad. To open or close the Notifications Cen‐ ter: swipe down or up with two fingers. To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. Calling up applications using buttons # Call up the application (/ page 282). Functions of the Voice Control System 1 2 3 4 5 y Calls up vehicle functions z Calls up navigation | Calls up radio or media % Calls up the telephone ß Press briefly: calls up favorites Press and hold: adds a favorite or theme # Alternatively, tap © on the touchscreen. or # Press the © button on the Touch Control or on the touchpad. The home screen appears. With the Voice Control System, various applica‐ tions in the MBUX multimedia system are opera‐ ble using voice input. The Voice Control System is operational approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat. The following multimedia system applications can be operated: R Navigation R Telephone R Radio and TV R Media player R Messages R Vehicle functions MBUX multimedia system 285 Starting the Voice Control System # Press rocker switch 1 up. or # Say "Hey Mercedes". Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant & WARNING Risk of injury due to laser beams from the camera This product uses a class 1 laser system If the housing is opened or damaged, invisible laser beams could damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. The camera is located in the overhead control panel. If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects specific hand positions (poses). For further information on system limits, display messages and troubleshooting notes, see the Digital Operator's Manual. 286 MBUX multimedia system The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions: Interaction area Interaction Description In front of the media display or above the touchpad Proximity to the control element The Interior Assistant recognizes the approach of the hand towards a con‐ trol element. Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger. No specific hand position is required. Above the center console Defined poses With defined poses a function is triggered depending on the application active. Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mir‐ ror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and off. Front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched off again. Switching the reading light and search light and on or off R Requirements: R For the reading light: the function is availa‐ ble when it is dark. The hand movement takes place in the inter‐ action area below the inside rearview mirror. R R For the search light: the function is availa‐ ble when it is dark. The hand movement takes place in the inter‐ action area above the front passenger seat. MBUX multimedia system 287 R The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle. Switching the search light on and off Switching the reading light on and off & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile # # Briefly move a hand up or down beneath the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or off for the driver or front passenger. Information on profiles, themes, suggestions and favorites # To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver. To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again. Selecting a profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the profile. You or other vehicle occu‐ pants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move‐ ment. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐ ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐ ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the media display. or 288 MBUX multimedia system # b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre‐ venter. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. Profiles store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own profile without needing to change the set‐ tings of other drivers. % Information on profiles from Mercedes me connect can be found in the Digital Opera‐ tor's Manual. Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate con‐ trol and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favorites. For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the freeway, you can save your prefer‐ red settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive pro‐ gram, for example. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then offers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The requirements for that are the selection of a profile, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. Favorites provide quick access to applications that are used often. You can select favorites from categories or add them directly to an appli‐ cation. Configuring profiles, themes and sugges‐ tions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles Creating a new profile Select W Create Profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and confirm with a. # Select Continue r . # Select Current Settings. # Select Save. # Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect Phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile . # Select Finish. # Selecting profile options # Select Ä for a profile. The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a profile R Resetting themes or favorites MBUX multimedia system 289 R Configuring suggestions Configuring suggestions # Select Ä for a profile. # Select Suggestion Settings. # Switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Suggestions on or off. # To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deactivate 24h Intelligent Learning. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula‐ ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function. Creating new themes Select ©. # Select THEMES. # # # # # # # # # # Select W Create Theme. The settings which are saved in the theme are shown. Select Continue r. Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and store the active settings in the theme. Select Continue r. Select an entry screen. Select Continue r. Select an image. Enter the names into the entry field and con‐ firm with a. Select Save. - R R R R System settings Overview of the system settings menu In the system settings menu, you can make set‐ tings in the following menus and control ele‐ ments: R Display Styles Instrument lighting Display brightness Edge lighting Day/night design Control elements Keyboard language and handwriting rec‐ ognition Touchpad sensitivity Sensitivity of the Touch Controls Voice Control System MBUX Interior Assistant Sound Entertainment Navigation and traffic announcements Telephone Voice amplification to the rear passenger compartment Connectivity Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, NFC MBUX Remote Control - R R 290 MBUX multimedia system Authorizing and de-authorizing devices Time & date Language Units for distance Software updates Data import/export PIN protection System Reset R R R R R R R Information on important system updates Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update R Activation of the downloaded system update by restarting the system % If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto‐ matically. The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available. You have the following selection options: R Accept and Install The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Information Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later The system update can be downloaded man‐ ually at a later time. Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. If the download of a deep system update is com‐ pleted and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next ignition cycle, for example. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation. Requirements for the installation: R The ignition is switched off. R Notes and warnings have been read and accepted. R The electric parking brake is applied. If all requirements have been fulfilled, the down‐ loaded system update is installed. The multime‐ dia system cannot be operated while the down‐ loaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali‐ fied specialist workshop to resolve the problem. MBUX multimedia system 291 Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot # Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul‐ timedia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module installed. R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described. # Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 System Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi. Connecting the multimedia system with an external hotspot using Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may differ depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐ tions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufactur‐ er's operating instructions. # Select Internet Settings. Select Connect via Wi-Fi. Select Add Hotspot. Connecting using a security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect Using Security Key. # Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐ tem. # Confirm the entry with ¡. Connecting using a WPS PIN Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN. # Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry. # Connecting using a button Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options on the device to be connected (see the man‐ ufacturer's operating instructions). # Press the WPS button on the device to be connected. # Select Continue in the multimedia system. # Activating automatic connection # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Activate Permanent Internet Connection. Connecting with a known Wi-Fi Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again. # 292 MBUX multimedia system Configuring the multimedia system as a WiFi hotspot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connec‐ tion established must be selected on the multi‐ media system and on the device to be connec‐ ted. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. Connecting using WPS PIN generation Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on the device to be connected and confirm. # Connecting using WPS PIN entry Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system. # Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # # Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Select Continue. Connecting using a security key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐ nected. The vehicle is displayed with the MB Hotspot XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry. Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Bring the mobile device into the NFC inter‐ face of the vehicle. # Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC. Generating a new security key # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Generate Security Key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key. # To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐ lished, the new security key must be entered. Navigation Notes on navigation Route guidance with augmented reality & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depic‐ tion or wrong interpretation of the dis‐ play The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. MBUX multimedia system 293 # # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation. Avoid extended observation of the cam‐ era image. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi‐ tional information The additional information from the augmen‐ ted reality display is not a substitute for observing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers. Switching navigation on Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation (Navigation) # Alternatively: press the z button. The map shows the vehicle's current posi‐ tion. The navigation menu is shown. # The navigation menu is hidden if route guid‐ ance is active. To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically. 294 MBUX multimedia system Navigation overview Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 To enter a POI or address and additional des‐ tination entry options 2 To cancel active route guidance 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or off 4 ON THE WAY menu with Route Overview, Alternative Routes and Report Traffic Incident (Car-to-X) TRAFFIC menu with Traffic Announcements, Area Alerts and Live Traffic Subscription Info To display Route List POSITION menu with Save Position and Compass 5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and Highway Information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced MBUX multimedia system 295 Entering a destination Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 1 The federal state or province in which the vehicle is located 2 Enters a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry 5 6 7 8 9 a Confirms an entry Switches to handwriting recognition Enters a space Switches to voice input Sets the written language A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters 296 MBUX multimedia system Enter the destination in 2. The entries can be made in any order. The following entries can be made, for exam‐ ple: R City, street, house number R Street, city R ZIP code R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name # Select a search result in list 3. The route can be calculated. % You can find further information about desti‐ nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Operator's Manual. # Changing country # Select the indicator for federal state or prov‐ ince 1. # Select the federal state or the province in 1. # Enter the country indicator. # Select the country on list 3. # Select the federal state or the province from list 3. Using online search Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destina‐ tions or if you change countries, the online search is available. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a 3 word address. # Select country indicator 1. # Select the provider for the online service from the countries list. or # If the on-board search delivers no results, enter the destination in input line 2. # Select the destination in the list. The detailed view for the route is displayed. Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance Requirements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 1 ¥ No route yet. ¦ A route has been mapped. # Select ¥. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins. or # Select ¦. MBUX multimedia system 297 # Select Set as Waypoint. The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination. or # Select Start New Route Guidance. The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins. Selecting route settings Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take traffic information into consideration with Dynamic Route Guidance r. # Select route options with Avoid Options. # Activate Suggest Alternative Route. Alternative routes are calculated for every route. # # Activate Activate Commuter Route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output. Activating route guidance with augmented reality # During route guidance, tap on the camera symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning maneu‐ ver and will show additional information. # To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again. Displaying additional information in the cam‐ era image # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Augmented Reality. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers. During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image. Using map functions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Setting the map scale To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one finger on the media display. # To zoom out: tap with two fingers on the media display. # Moving the map Move one finger in any direction on the touchscreen. # To reset the map to the current vehicle position: press \ briefly. # Selecting map orientation Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D Heading Up to 2D North Up. # Switching freeway information on/off Select Z. # 298 MBUX multimedia system # Switch Highway Information on or off. Using services Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author‐ ized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Displaying the traffic situation with Live Traf‐ fic Information # Select Z. # Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Switch on Traffic Incidents, Free Flowing Traffic and Delay. If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn‐ ing messages are displayed. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration. Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-XCommunication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic Incidents options. # Set the options. If Traffic is switched off and Traffic Incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route. Displaying weather information and other map contents # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CONTENT category. # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. MBUX multimedia system 299 Telephone Telephony Notes on telephony & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ ating integrated communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. & WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com‐ munications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can‐ not be thrown around in such situa‐ tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart‐ ment. 300 MBUX multimedia system Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 119) Bluetooth® connection: The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® profile of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth® profiles: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system. R MAP (Message Access Profile) The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system. Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functional‐ ity can by used with any mobile radio unit. For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the man‐ ufacturer's operating instructions. Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A require‐ ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect MBUX multimedia system 301 Telephone menu overview 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone 2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) 3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal strength of the mobile phone network Options Device manager Messages Numerical pad Contact search Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel‐ ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐ dia system via Bluetooth®. 302 MBUX multimedia system R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode). You can use all the functions of the multi‐ media system with the mobile phone in the foreground. You can receive incoming calls and mes‐ sages with the mobile phone in the back‐ ground. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background. Connecting a mobile phone Requirements: R Bluetooth® R is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐ tions). Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone Searching for a mobile phone Select í. # Select Connect New Device. R # Connecting a mobile phone Authorization follows using secure simple pair‐ ing. # Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone. Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.: R Accept a call k End Call i Create Conf. Call Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.: Downloading mobile phone contacts Managing the format of a contact's name Saving a contact as a favorite Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: Using the read-aloud function Dictating a new message Mercedes me and apps Mercedes me connect Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv‐ ices. You can use the following services via the multi‐ media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Concierge Service (me button), if activated MBUX multimedia system 303 R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto‐ matic emergency call and SOS button) Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management, the Mercedes me connect Con‐ cierge Service (if service is activated) and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are availa‐ ble for you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 304). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 305). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 310). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Information on Mercedes me connect Acci‐ dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system (/ page 310) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for‐ wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci‐ dent and Breakdown Management. Forward‐ ing the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehi‐ cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. R Addition to the emergency guide after auto‐ matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 305) R In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur‐ ther vehicle data is sent which enables opti‐ mal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are sub‐ ject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary. 304 MBUX multimedia system % These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover‐ age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia sys‐ tem. More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Data transferred during Mercedes me con‐ nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con‐ nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con‐ trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services Which data is transferred for the services can be taken from the currently valid terms of use. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me por‐ tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Mercedes me calls Making a call via the overhead control panel # # # To make a Mercedes me call: press me button 1. To make an emergency call: press SOS button cover 2 briefly to open. Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second. If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. 1 me button for service, concierge or informa‐ tion calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system) Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the over‐ head control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 304). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Concierge Service (if the service is activated) R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general information about the vehicle MBUX multimedia system 305 You can find information on the following topics: Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from MercedesBenz R Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 306). Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system Requirements: R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network cover‐ age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automati‐ cally. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display. Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % In some countries, or if the Concierge Service is active, you will be connected directly with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. The Concierge Service is not available in all countries. More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection Requirements: R R R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation. The vehicle is stationary. The hazard warning lights are switched on. % This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec‐ ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. # Select Call. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Break‐ down Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 303). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center takes your call and organizes the break‐ down and accident assistance. 306 MBUX multimedia system You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initi‐ ated. This has priority over all other active calls. % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined. % If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again. Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage‐ ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom‐ mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi‐ media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer center takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint‐ ment and if necessary consult about the details. % If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reap‐ pears at a later time. Transferred data during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The ignition is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup‐ ported by the mobile service operator. R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi‐ cient. Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect serv‐ ices. R The service selected in the voice control sys‐ tem. MBUX multimedia system 307 Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv‐ ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa‐ ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys‐ tem, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv‐ ices are activated Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service. An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and, if required to process the incident, forwar‐ ded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page at https:// www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % The recorded message is not available in every country. Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me apps updated. You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system. 308 MBUX multimedia system In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes me user account and the vehicle 1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks 3 Web page, back R R Calling up the Mercedes me services Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the web browser depending on availability 4 Web page, forwards 5 To refresh/stop 6 Options Web browser overview You can call up websites with the web browser. The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. MBUX multimedia system 309 Smartphone integration With Smartphone Integration, you can use cer‐ tain functions on your mobile phone via the mul‐ timedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ ted via Smartphone Integration to the multime‐ dia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Blue‐ tooth® with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte‐ gration is only possible with an Internet connec‐ tion. The appropriate application must be down‐ loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the ç symbol on the multimedia system using a suita‐ ble cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration R Mercedes-Benz Link (implementation of the function using the Mercedes-Benz Link con‐ trol box) R Apple CarPlay® R Android Auto You can start Smartphone Integration using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. You can end Smartphone Integration by discon‐ necting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized) The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R R Compass direction Acceleration direction This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel). Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient net‐ work coverage from the wireless service provid‐ ers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your MercedesBenz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data 310 MBUX multimedia system detailed in the "Mercedes-Benz emergency call system data transmission" section that follows (/ page 312). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod‐ ule. Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me con‐ nect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐ matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans‐ ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system. Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 310) or manually (/ page 311) Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit‐ uation. Messages on the display SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall not available. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedesbenz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction in the MercedesBenz emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS but‐ ton), a corresponding message appears in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Triggering an automatic Mercedes‑Benz emergency call Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system trig‐ gers an emergency call automatically in the fol‐ lowing cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident R After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist MBUX multimedia system 311 The emergency call has been made: A voice connection is made to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R R The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐ matic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer‐ gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐ lance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press and hold the SOS but‐ ton for at least one second (/ page 304). # To use the voice control system: use the Voice Control System voice commands . The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. # R R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer‐ gency call center operator. Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # On the multifunction steering wheel: select ~. Depress the button for several seconds. 312 MBUX multimedia system Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system In the event of an automatic or manual emer‐ gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route ( (a few hundred meters )before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU‐ SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FORMERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter‐ mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. MBUX multimedia system 313 Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu Symbol Designation Function 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. : Repeating a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated. 9 Random playback Select to play back tracks in random order. ûü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track. ß Options Select to show additional options. 5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres, moods or videos, for example. 314 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function Z Settings Select to make settings. © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. 2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode The following functions and settings are available in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®) R Playing back audio or video files Authorizing a Bluetooth® audio device for media playback Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment. R R The audio equipment supports the Blue‐ tooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media Bluetooth® 5 Bluetooth 5 ª With audio, you can play back music files from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system. # To play back audio files using the multimedia system, authorize the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system. Authorizing a new Bluetooth® audio device # Select Connect New Device. # Select an audio device. Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment. # Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connec‐ ted with the multimedia system. MBUX multimedia system 315 Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth® audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. The connection is being established. Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu Symbol Designation Function © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. ûü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station. Z Options Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following addi‐ tional functions, for example: R Navigation and traffic announcements R Frequency Fix function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings The setting options are country-dependent. 316 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function HD HD radio Select to switch the HD radio function on or off. This function is not available in all countries. 8 Mute function Select to switch off the sound f Storing radio stations Select to save a station in the presets 4 Station list Select to have the station list shown. ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres, moods or videos, for example. Additional functions of TuneIn Radio % A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using TuneIn Radio. MBUX multimedia system 317 Symbol Designation Function Z Options The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to/out of the TuneIn account ß Favorites Select during playback to save the station cur‐ rently set as a favorite. 6 Play/Stop Select to start, stop or continue playback. 5 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station. Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM® satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter‐ tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM® satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satel‐ lites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. 318 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function Z Options The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate parental control to lock channels with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam‐ lessly 5 Playback controls Select to show the timeline. Tap any point on the timeline to skip forwards or back. Navigate to the end of the timeline to return to live mode. 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. Depending on the frequency band selected, dif‐ ferent functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner. Calling up TuneIn Radio Requirements: MBUX multimedia system 319 R R R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me portal. The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐ sion free of interference. % New data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal. % The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing. % The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. Setting up satellite radio Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchas‐ ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z Options # Select Service Information. The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current sub‐ scription status. # Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. % You can also have the satellite service acti‐ vated online. To do so, please visit http:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Music and sport alerts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 Alerts 5 SiriusXM 5 Z Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of matches in the Live program. Activating the music information function Activate Music Alerts O. # Setting a music alert Select Add Alert. # 320 MBUX multimedia system # Select Artists or Song in the dialog window. The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the station. Activating sports information Activate Activate Sports Alerts O. # Setting a sport alert Select Add Alert. # Select the team name or league in the dialog window. # Deleting individual sports and music alerts Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select an artist or track. or # Select a team. # Select Delete Selected Entries. All highlighted alerts are deleted. # Deleting all sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Delete All Entries. All alerts are deleted. Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual. Standard sound system and Advanced sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume Automatic adjustment Burmester® surround sound system and Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seats (Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system) R Sound profiles R Volume Automatic adjustment Maintenance and care 321 ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the Instrument Display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv‐ icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Displaying the service due date On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer (/ page 276). Information on regular maintenance work * NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Service work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # # Always observe the prescribed service intervals. Always have the prescribed service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐ mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi‐ cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi‐ bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci‐ fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐ ate stops R mainly short-distance driving 322 Maintenance and care R R R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces when the engine is often left idling for long periods operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur‐ ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can only calculate the service due date when the battery is connected. # Note down the service due date displayed on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 321). Engine compartment Opening/closing the hood & WARNING Risk of accident due to driv‐ ing with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Open or close the hood only when there is nobody in the hood's range of move‐ ment. & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ ing the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. Maintenance and care 323 # # # Never reach into the danger zone sur‐ rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. Remove jewelery and watches. Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts. & WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart‐ ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. Opens the hood & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open When the engine hood is open and the wind‐ shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before opening the engine hood. # To release the hood, pull on handle 1. 324 Maintenance and care # # # # Push handle 1 of the hood catch upwards and lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm). Closing the hood * NOTE Damage to the hood If the hood is closed manually, there is a risk of dents. Do not close the hood manually. Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in (20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go. If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level You will see one of the following messages on the multifunction display: R Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible. # Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunction display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct. Engine oil R Checking the engine oil level using the onboard computer Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R Engine Oil Level Add 1,1 qts. and the bar dis‐ play for indicating the oil level on the multi‐ function display is orange and is below "min": # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunc‐ tion display is orange and is above "max": The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. R Maintenance and care 325 # R # R Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil level. Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected. R Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail. # Close the hood. # Refilling engine oil & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart‐ ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart‐ ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐ oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐ nent parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ tives # # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi‐ cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals. Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. Do not use additives. # Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. * NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop. % Depending on the engine, the cap may be installed in the engine compartment in dif‐ ferent locations. 326 Maintenance and care Checking coolant level & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart‐ ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant # # # # Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. Add engine oil. Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages. Check the oil level again (/ page 324). If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres‐ sure. # # # Park the vehicle on a level surface. Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be in the bot‐ tom quarter of the temperature display. Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to release overpressure. Maintenance and care 327 # Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R if the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar 2. R if the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 0.6 in (1.5 cm) over marker bar 2. If necessary, add coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. % Further information on coolant (/ page 398) # Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart‐ ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ ing the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # # R Remove cap 1 by the tab. Add washer fluid. Further information about the washer fluid (/ page 399) 328 Maintenance and care Keeping the air-water duct free # Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves. Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash & WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored. * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐ tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit‐ uations: # During towing # In a car wash * NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash # Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions. # # Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐ ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash. Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the HOLD function are deactivated. R The surround view camera or the rear view camera is switched off. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R The outside mirrors are folded in. R The blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off. R The windshield wiper switch is in position g. R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle, otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. Maintenance and care 329 R In car washes with a conveyor system: neu‐ tral i is engaged. % Drive straight and in to the center of the guide rails of the car wash to prevent dam‐ age to the tires and rims. % In car washes with a conveyor system: if you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the SmartKey is located in the vehicle. The park position j is otherwise automatically engaged. % If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. Automatic car wash mode In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into the automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 12 mph (20 km/h) (/ page 330). The following settings are made when car wash mode is activated: R The outside mirrors are folded in. R R R R R R R The rain sensor is deactivated to prevent the windshield washer system from starting up automatically. The rear window wiper is deactivated. Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: the running boards are retracted. The air conditioning system is set to air-recir‐ culation mode. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Vehicles with surround view camera: the front image is activated after approx. eight seconds. Vehicles with AIRMATIC: the vehicle is raised to the maximum possible chassis level(/ page 231). If rising takes longer than 25 seconds, the following message appears on the multifunc‐ tion display: Preparation for Automatic Car Wash Incomplete See Media Display. After some time, the vehicle automatically continues rising. R Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: the vehicle is raised to the maximum possi‐ ble chassis level(/ page 240). If rising takes longer than 25 seconds, the following message appears on the multifunc‐ tion display: Preparation for Automatic Car Wash Incomplete See Media Display. After some time, the vehicle automatically continues rising. If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a % behind the respective set‐ ting. Above a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) car wash mode is automatically deactivated. The following settings are reset when car wash mode is deactivated: R The outside mirrors are folded out. R The rain sensor is activated. R The rear window wiper is activated. R The air conditioning system is set to fresh air mode. 330 Maintenance and care R R R R R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is reset to the previously selected setting. Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: the running boards remain retracted. Vehicles with surround view camera: the front image is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). Vehicles with AIRMATIC: the vehicle is low‐ ered to the previously set chassis level. Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: the vehicle is lowered to the previously set chassis level. Activating/deactivating automatic car wash mode Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The engine is running. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings Notes on using a power washer 5 Quick Access Activating automatic car wash mode # Select Automatic Car Wash Mode. # Select Start. If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a % behind the respective set‐ ting. % For an overview of the settings made when activating automatic car wash mode (/ page 328). Deactivating automatic car wash mode Select Stop. The automatic car wash settings are reset. % The automatic car wash mode is automati‐ cally deactivated as soon as a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) is exceeded. # & WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex‐ pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with roundspray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts replaced immediately. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐ lowing when using a power washer: R Keep the SmartKey at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintenance and care 331 R R Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140 °F (60 °C). Observe the information on the correct dis‐ tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐ ating instructions. Do not point the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts such as tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sour‐ ces and ventilation slots. Washing the vehicle by hand Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood. Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driver assistance systems. Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro‐ leum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. Remove dirt immediately, where possible. Matte finish Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash programs with a final hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish‐ ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. R In the event of paintwork damage: R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function (/ page 201). 332 Maintenance and care Notes on cleaning decorative foils Observe the notes on matte finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint‐ work care" (/ page 331). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage. Cleaning For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora‐ tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom‐ mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash. Avoiding damage to the decorative foil The service life and color of decorative foils are impaired by: Sunlight Temperature, e.g. hot air blower Weather conditions Stone chippings and dirt Chemical cleaning agents Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matte or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur. R Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif‐ ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car‐ ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Notes on care of vehicle parts & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. Maintenance and care 333 & WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐ pipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. Observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehicle parts to avoid damage. Wheels/rims R Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brake pads warm up and dry out. Windows Clean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom‐ mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows. R Wiper blades Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth. R Do not clean the wiper blades too often. R Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the radiator grill with a soft cloth and car shampoo. R When using a power washer, maintain a mini‐ mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). Running boards R Use water and acid-free cleaning agents. R Do not clean the aluminum trim insert of the running board with alkaline or acidic cleaning agents such as wheel cleaners. Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. The aluminum trim inserts could otherwise be damaged. Rear view camera and surround view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia system (/ page 255). R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. R Do not use a power washer. Tailpipes Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents. R 334 Maintenance and care Trailer hitch R Remove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush. R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. R After cleaning, oil or grease the ball head lightly. R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's operating instructions. R Do not clean the ball neck with a power washer or solvent. Notes on care of the interior & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol‐ vent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing sol‐ vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐ ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts. Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid vehicle damage. Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 176 °F (80 °C) or exposing them to direct sunlight. Display Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT/LCD). R Do not use any other agents. R Plastic trim Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a care product recom‐ mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ rials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plas‐ tic trim. R Real wood/trim elements R Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use a care product recom‐ mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. Headliner Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. R Carpet Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec‐ ommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Maintenance and care 335 Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. DINAMICA seat covers Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. R Imitation leather seat covers Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. R Cloth seat covers Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1% soap solution and allow to dry. R 336 Breakdown assistance Emergency Removing the safety vest The safety vests are located in the safety vest compartments in the driver's and front passenger door stowage compartments. Open safety vest bag 1 and remove the safety vest. % Additional safety vests can be stored in the stowage space of the rear passenger com‐ partment and in the cargo compartment. # The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. Replace the safety vest in the following cases: R It is damaged or dirt on the reflective strips can no longer be removed. R The maximum number of washes is excee‐ ded. R The fluorescence of the safety vest has faded. Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle # To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by loop 2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Maximum number of washes Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean This is a class 2 vest Breakdown assistance 337 # Remove warning triangle 1. Setting up the warning triangle # # Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri‐ angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud 2. Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview All other vehicles Mercedes‑Maybach vehicles In the as-delivered state, the first-aid kit (soft sided) is in the cargo compartment on the righthand side behind service flap 1. Example: first-aid kit (soft sided) In the as-delivered state, first-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is in the cargo compartment in the left-hand or right-hand stowage compartment, depending on the model. 338 Breakdown assistance Flat tire Notes in the event of a flat tire & WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire A flat tire severely affects the driving charac‐ teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire). In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐ ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos‐ sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 338). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 339). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 304). R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 379). % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries. Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) & WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode When driving in emergency mode the han‐ dling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP® intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls # After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special‐ Breakdown assistance 339 # ist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How‐ ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐ junction with an activated tire pressure monitor‐ ing system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display, proceed as follows: R Check the tires for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes. Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning: Load condition Driving distance pos‐ sible in emergency mode Partially laden 50 miles (80 km) Fully laden 19 miles (30 km) The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand‐ ard tire as a temporary measure. TIREFIT kit storage location The TIREFIT kit is located under the cargo com‐ partment floor. Example: TIREFIT kit 1 Tire sealant bottle 2 Tire inflation compressor Using the TIREFIT kit Requirements: R Tire sealant bottle and tire inflation compres‐ sor (/ page 339). R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment) You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora‐ tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly 340 Breakdown assistance those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C). & WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than damage previously men‐ tioned. R The wheel rim is damaged. R You have driven at very low tire pressure or on a flat tire. # # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita‐ tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐ oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water. # If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor‐ oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of any clothes contamina‐ ted with tire sealant immediately. # If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately. * NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐ tion compressor running too long # Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali‐ fied specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tire. Breakdown assistance 341 # # Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire. # # Push plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tire inflation compres‐ sor. # Switch on the tire inflation compressor using On/Off switch 3. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum‐ ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compres‐ sor during this phase. # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). # # # # Pull plug 4 with cable and hose 5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing. # Remove the cap from valve 7 on the faulty tire. Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Switch on the ignition. If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐ ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐ lene. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. 342 Breakdown assistance # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Drive forwards or reverse very slowly for approximately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained If the minimum tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the faulty tire. & WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. # Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h). * NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ sponsible disposal Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. # # Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐ tion compressor. Pull away immediately. Breakdown assistance 343 # Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery & WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐ tery & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire seal‐ ant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. In cases such as the one mentioned above, con‐ tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. # # # # # To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2. When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire. Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot‐ tle. Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐ shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there. Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys‐ tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions # # In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐ lar incident, contact a qualified special‐ ist workshop immediately. Do not drive on. 344 Breakdown assistance # R R Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on ABS (/ page 203) Further information on ESP® (/ page 203) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes‐ ted and approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery & WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐ trostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat‐ tery. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance. All vehicles + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by improper disposal of batteries & WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐ oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Breakdown assistance 345 Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐ sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat‐ tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery. Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐ tion point in the engine compartment. * NOTE Damaging the battery through overvoltage When charging using a battery charger with‐ out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the vehicle electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐ tion point in the engine compartment. * NOTE Damaging the battery through overvoltage When charging using a battery charger with‐ out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the vehicle electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. 346 Breakdown assistance & WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐ gen gas igniting & WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. # Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. # The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con‐ necting and disconnecting the battery. # When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat‐ tery terminals with identical polarity. # During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con‐ necting and disconnecting the jumper cable. # Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐ tery clamps while the engine is running. During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo‐ sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventila‐ tion. # Do not lean over a battery. & WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐ zen battery A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐ tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg‐ ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assis‐ tance. If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐ zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe‐ cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐ tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles * NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Breakdown assistance 347 Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg‐ ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from fire and open flames. R Do not lean over the battery. Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc‐ tions before charging the battery. Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Jumpstart the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Requirements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The transmission is in position j. R The ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off. R The hood is open. Example: engine compartment # # Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc‐ tion of the arrow. Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the donor battery using the jumper cable/charging cable. Always 348 Breakdown assistance # # # # # # begin with positive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first. During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed. Connect the negative pole of the donor bat‐ tery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle by using the jumper cable/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first. During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle. During the charging process: start the charging process. During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes. During starting assistance: before discon‐ necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec‐ trical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting. When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps: # # First, remove the jumper cable/charging cable from ground point 3 and the negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp 2 and the positive pole of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first. After removing the jumper cable/charging cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2. Further information can be obtained at a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. Replacing the 12 V battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 343). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle require‐ ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol‐ ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith‐ ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith‐ ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con‐ nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are recon‐ nected in the same way. Breakdown assistance 349 Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods R R * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐ tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC HOLD function Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit‐ uations: # During towing # In a car wash For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys‐ tems. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐ ing away incorrectly # Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. Permitted towing methods Vehicle equipment/towing method 4MATIC vehicles Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) No No 350 Breakdown assistance Towing away the vehicle with both axles on the ground # # Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 349). Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. A discharged battery has the following effects: R The engine cannot be started R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied R The automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ ted to position i or j % If the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ ted to position i, or the multifunction dis‐ play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, the vehicle must be transported away (/ page 351). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transportation. * NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis‐ tances The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐ ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) must not be exceeded. & WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy If the vehicle being tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn. # If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle. # # # # Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐ tification plate (/ page 392). Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door as the automatic transmis‐ sion may otherwise shift to position j auto‐ matically. Install the towing eye (/ page 353). Fasten the tow bar. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐ tion of the tow bar # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. % You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch. # Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 72). # Do not activate the HOLD function. Breakdown assistance 351 # # # # Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 92). Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 211). Shift the automatic transmission to position i(/ page 186). Release the electric parking brake. & WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ ted safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐ ger available in the following situations: R the ignition is switched off. R the brake system or power steering sys‐ tem is malfunctioning. R the energy supply or the on-board electri‐ cal system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐ icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely, before towing the vehicle away. * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly. Loading the vehicle for transport # # Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 350). Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle. % You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch. # Shift the automatic transmission to position i. % The automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrics. To shift to i, provide the onboard electrical system with power (/ page 347). # Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Shift the automatic transmission to position j. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS) & WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS The reduced damping forces on the vehicle being transported can cause the vehicle/ trailer combination to start to swing. As a result, when transporting vehicles with the Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the 352 Breakdown assistance vehicle/trailer combination may start to skid. Consequently, you could lose control of your vehicle. # When transporting, ensure that: R The vehicle has been loaded onto the transporter correctly R The vehicle is secured at all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps R The maximum permissible speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) is not exceeded when transporting * NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur‐ ing it incorrectly # # After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform. # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading. Towing eye storage location 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission Example: towing eye # Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning # Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi‐ cle. Towing eye 1 is located under the cargo com‐ partment floor. Breakdown assistance 353 Installing the towing eye towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch. % Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐ cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐ ess. # Only use the towing eye to tow away or tow start the vehicle. Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start) # # Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove. Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. Vehicles with a trailer hitch: Vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the Vehicles with automatic transmission * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐ mission due to tow starting The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # # Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow started. Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐ ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐ fied new fuses containing the correct amperage. 354 Breakdown assistance * NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func‐ tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and fur‐ ther information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the cargo compartment (/ page 355). * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box. When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐ rectly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐ ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off. The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 354) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 355) R R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 355) Fuse box in the cargo compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 355) Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment Requirement: R You need a dry cloth and a screwdriver. Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 353). Opening & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open When the engine hood is open and the wind‐ shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. Breakdown assistance 355 # Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before opening the engine hood. Closing Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐ rectly in the lid. # Insert the lid into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box. # Fold down the lid of the fuse box and tighten screws 2. # Close the hood. # Opening and closing the fuse box in the cargo compartment Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 353). # Open the side cover. Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit The fuse box is on the side of the dashboard under a cover. # Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ ter for further information. # # Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. Loosen screws 2 and remove fuse box lid 1 from the top. Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell # Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ ter for further information. # Remove cover 1. The fuse allocation chart is on the side of the fuse box. 356 Wheels and tires Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐ teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi‐ cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire dam‐ age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires & WARNING Risk of injury through dam‐ aged tires Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. & WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread R Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. R R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. Check the valve caps. Visual check of the tire tread depth and the tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in (4 mm). Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: â in (3 mm) R M+S tires: ãin (4 mm) # For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐ ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving offroad: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 357). Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Wheels and tires 357 Notes on snow chains & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect mounting of snow chains If you have mounted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never mount snow chains on the front wheels. # Only mount snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs. * NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to fitted snow chains If you fit snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo‐ nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles. R R R R R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. If snow chains are installed, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: If snow chains are instal‐ led, only drive at raised vehicle level . % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 205). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ ficient or excessive tire pressure Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. # R R Comply with the recommended tire pressure and check the tire pressure of all tires including the spare wheel regu‐ larly: at least once a month when the load changes 358 Wheels and tires R before embarking on a longer journey if operating conditions change, e.g. offroad driving # Adjust the tire pressure as necessary. R Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure Tires with pressure that is too low can over‐ heat and burst as a result. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking properties and the han‐ dling characteristics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressures in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Tire pressure which is too low can cause: Tire malfunctions as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Increased fuel consumption R & WARNING Risk of accident from exces‐ sive tire pressure Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by highway fill, pot holes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐ ing properties and the handling characteris‐ tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R R Impaired driving comfort Susceptibility to damage & WARNING Risk of accident caused by repeated drop in tire pressure If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Insufficient tire pressure can cause the tires to burst. # Inspect the tire for signs of foreign objects. # Check whether the wheel or valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can find information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 363). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (/ page 359). Wheels and tires 359 Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 369). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile (1.6 km). The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem: You can also check the tire pressure using the on-board computer. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort. & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valve If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause a loss of tire pressure. Aftermarket tire pressure monitor‐ ing systems will cause the tire valve to remain open, depending on the design. This can also result in a loss of tire pressure. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Notes on towing a trailer Always inflate the rear axle tires to the recom‐ mended tire pressure on the tire pressure table for increased load. Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example data. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num‐ bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. 360 Wheels and tires Checking tire pressures manually R Read the tire pressure for the current operat‐ ing conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure. # Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked. # Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. # Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom‐ mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. # If the tire pressure is higher than the recom‐ mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. # Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 357) R # Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 370). R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 363) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 369) Tire pressure table (/ page 359) Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 363) Tire pressure monitoring system Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem & DANGER Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect tire pressure Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommen‐ ded by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehi‐ cle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter‐ mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor‐ ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire Wheels and tires 361 pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐ ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu‐ minates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi‐ cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han‐ dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi‐ bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres‐ sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate that the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys‐ tem detects a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina‐ ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea‐ sons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi‐ cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace‐ ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed to the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the multifunction display (/ page 362). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned in the following ways: R via display messages (/ page 455) R via the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 472) The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val‐ ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 362). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R the tire pressure has been set incorrectly R there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for example, by a foreign object penetrating the tire 362 Wheels and tires there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source R Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres‐ sure monitoring system Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. R R On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure and tire temperature of the individual wheels: Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being moni‐ tored. Compare the tire pressure with the recom‐ mended tire pressure for the current operat‐ ing condition (/ page 359). Observe the notes on tire temperature (/ page 357). % The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐ play may deviate from those of the tire pres‐ sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure value indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure. # Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 357). Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message is shown in the multi‐ function display. # To restart, press Touch Control on the lefthand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur‐ rent tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. Wheels and tires 363 Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 357) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac‐ ard & WARNING Risk of accident from overloa‐ ded tires Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris‐ tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load-bearing capacity of the tires. # The load-bearing capacity must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. 1 Tire and Loading Information placard % The data shown in the illustration is example data. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows: R Maximum number of seats 2 according to the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle. R Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. 364 Wheels and tires R Recommended tire pressures 1 for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 392). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres‐ sure table (/ page 359). # # # # Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load (/ page 364) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 357). Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur‐ suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # # (1): Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard. (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas‐ sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐ ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) (5): Determine the combined weight of lug‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. The weight may not safely exceed the availa‐ ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula‐ ted in Step 4. (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter‐ mine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. % Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Even if you have calculated the total load care‐ fully, you should still make sure that the maxi‐ mum permissible gross weight and the maxi‐ mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi‐ cle identification plate. # Have your loaded vehicle – including driver, occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate. Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max‐ imum load (/ page 365) Wheels and tires 365 R R R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 363) Tire pressure table (/ page 359) Vehicle identification plate Calculation example for determining the maximum load The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi‐ cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 363). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Step 2 366 Wheels and tires Example 1 Example 2 Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg) Step 3 Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Wheels and tires 367 Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling 5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 370) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 370) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the image is example data. Tire Quality Grading In accordance with the US Department of Trans‐ portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand‐ ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per‐ formance factors: 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (/ page 367) 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (/ page 368) 3 Maximum tire load (/ page 369) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 369) 1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade % The data shown in the illustration is example data. % The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated. Tread wear grade The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified test track of the US Department of Transportation. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one 368 Wheels and tires and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Traction grade & DANGER Risk of accident due to inade‐ quate traction The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include either accelera‐ tion, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. # Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin # Avoid wheelspin. The traction classes, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern‐ ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform‐ ance. Temperature grade & WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐ lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres‐ sures and regularly check the tire pres‐ # sure of all tires including the spare wheel. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐ tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of per‐ formance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man‐ ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced. Wheels and tires 369 R R R % The data shown in the image is example data. The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu‐ facturer identification code 2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 375). Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008). % The data shown in the image is example data. Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi‐ ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci‐ fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv‐ er's side (/ page 363). Specifications for maximum tire pressure Information on the maximum tire load % The data shown in the image is example data. 370 Wheels and tires Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci‐ fied for the tire. Information on tire characteristics Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ ing the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. % The data shown in the image is example data. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall 1 and under tire tread 2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Preceding letter Nominal tire width in millimeters Aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load-bearing index Speed rating Load index % The data shown in the image is example data. Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tires 371 Preceding letter 1: Without: passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu‐ facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. R Aspect ratio 3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per‐ cent (tire height divided by tire width). Tire code 4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above 149 mph (240 km/h) (optional) Rim diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index 6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre‐ sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the permissible axle load of your vehi‐ cle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 363) R Maximum tire load (/ page 369) R Load index Speed rating 7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. % An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) 372 Wheels and tires Index Speed rating ZR...Y4 up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y)4 over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR4 over 149 mph (240 km/h) R R R 4 5 Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there is no speed rating 7, find out what the max‐ imum speed is from the tire manufacturer. If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7 are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer. "ZR" stated in the tire code. Or "M+S i" for winter tires All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating M+S5 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S5 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S5 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S5 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Q Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu‐ facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. Load index 8: No specification given: standard load (SL) tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein‐ forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire R R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubbercoated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly‐ ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOTmarked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi‐ cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg). Wheels and tires 373 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow‐ ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen‐ ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac‐ tory. The tire and information table contains the rec‐ ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max‐ imum permissible load and the maximum per‐ missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen‐ ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso‐ ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐ gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐ cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci‐ fied on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equip‐ ment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the loadbearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand‐ ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if 374 Wheels and tires these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi‐ mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi‐ mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur‐ chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur‐ er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric‐ tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐ tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐ nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Wheels and tires 375 Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect dimensions of wheels and tires If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen‐ sion components may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: R Designation R Model When replacing tires, make sure to install the correct: R Designation R Manufacturer R Model & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ ing the specified tire load-bearing capa‐ city or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the con‐ trol systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐ tain AMG tires) Certain characteristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Fur‐ thermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle com‐ ponents when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. 376 Wheels and tires Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐ ded tires Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom‐ mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐ anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. * NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a lower tire section width. The lower the tire section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles. # Avoid obstacles or drive particularly carefully. * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # If possible, park only on flat surfaces. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking. * NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop only. * NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, caus‐ ing permanent damage to the tires. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C), use M+S tires . Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations & WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires There is an increased risk of skidding and hydroplaning when using sport tires on wet roads. Wheels and tires 377 In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Activate ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly. # Use M+S tires at outside temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C). # Only use the tires for their intended pur‐ pose. Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right). It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R R R R R R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: All installed wheels must be equip‐ ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use win‐ ter tires or all-season tires marked M+S for all wheels. Winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym‐ bol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road condi‐ tions. For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread. Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R When replacing with tires that do not fea‐ ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. For more information on wheels and tires, con‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 357) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 363) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 370) R Tire pressure table (/ page 359) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel (/ page 385) 378 Wheels and tires Notes on rotating wheels & WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐ ent wheel sizes Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tires have different dimensions may severely impair the driving characteris‐ tics. The wheel brakes or wheel suspension com‐ ponents may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimen‐ sions. The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of the tire R Rear wheels wear more at the center of the tire Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 379). Notes on storing wheels For more information on which tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. Required tire-change tools may include, for example: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench Tire-change tool kit 1 is located under the cargo compartment floor. When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease or fuel. Overview of the tire-change tool kit Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐ cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. The tire-change tool kit includes the following: R Jack Wheels and tires 379 R R R R R Lug wrench Wheel studs Extension attachment for wheel studs, if nec‐ essary (depending on vehicle version) Folding chock Ratchet wrench Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements: R The required tire-change tool is available. If your vehicle is not equipped with the tirechange tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. # # # Apply the electric parking brake manually. Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. Shift the transmission to position j. # # # # # Vehicles with level control system: Set the normal vehicle level (/ page 231). Switch off the engine. Make sure that the engine cannot be started. Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐ nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Raise the vehicle (/ page 380). Additionally, for Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: Retract the running boards (/ page 75) # To remove stone chipping protective covers 2: # # # Loosen expansion rivet 1 and pull it out. Fold down and remove stone chipping pro‐ tective covers 2. Removing and installing hub caps Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 379). 380 Wheels and tires Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the center cover of the hub cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap. # To install: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise. # Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. Aluminum hub cap Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. # To install: follow the instructions above in reverse order. % Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). # To remove: position socket 2 from the tirechange tool kit on hub cap 1. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. The foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐ cally under the jack support point. Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 379). Important notes on using the jack: Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐ nance work under the vehicle. R # R # Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the tail‐ gate. R Wheels and tires 381 * NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐ cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐ port points. # Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com‐ pletely. Position of jack support points & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropri‐ ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle. # Take the ratchet wrench out of the tirechange tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible. 382 Wheels and tires Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: # # # Turn ratchet wrench 3 clockwise until jack 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. Continue to turn ratchet wrench 3 until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 382). Removing a wheel Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 380). # # # # Position jack 2 at jack support point 1. Turn ratchet wrench 3 clockwise until jack 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. Continue to turn ratchet wrench 3 until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 382). Requirements: R The running boards are retracted (/ page 75) R The stone chipping protective covers are removed (/ page 379) # Position jack 2 at jack support point 1. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking. Wheels and tires 383 * NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts # # # Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. Completely unscrew the wheel bolts. Remove the wheel. Mounting a new wheel Requirements: R The wheel is removed (/ page 382). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐ nize dangers. & WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐ ing. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐ aged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving. # Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 375). For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc‐ tion of rotation when installing. & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # # # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 375). For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by MercedesBenz and for the wheel in question. * NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt If the wheel has too much play when screw‐ ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the wheel hub when screwing on the first wheel bolt. # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight. 384 Wheels and tires # # If the collapsible spare wheel has been installed, inflate the collapsible spare wheel (/ page 388). Lower the vehicle (/ page 384). # # Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed (/ page 383). Observe the information on tire pressure (/ page 357). # Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the lettering "AB" is visible. # To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet wrench of the jack counter-clockwise. # # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with a maximum of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm). Then tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diag‐ onal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 to the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft (150 Nm). & WARNING Risk of injury through incor‐ rect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. # Make sure the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor‐ que checked immediately. Check the tire pressure of the newly moun‐ ted wheel and adjust accordingly. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 362). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. Wheels and tires 385 Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel & WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly. # Do not switch off ESP®. # Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work‐ shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. R % The emergency spare wheel is fastened in the cargo compartment under the cargo compartment floor. % Not for Mercedes-Maybach vehicles. Observe the following notes on removing an emergency spare wheel: R Before stowing the emergency spare wheel, make sure there is no air left in the tire. If necessary, allow the air to escape. R To release air from the tire: remove the valve cap of the tire. R Press down the metal insert in the valve using a pointed object, e.g. a pen. R Screw the valve cap onto the valve. R Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not install snow chains on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. % Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 357) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 363) R Tire pressure table (/ page 359) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 375) 386 Wheels and tires Inflating the emergency spare wheel * NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐ tion compressor running too long # Observe the notes on sockets: (/ page 135) # Press the start/stop button once to switch on the power supply. (/ page 168) Press On/Off switch 4 on the tire inflation compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on manometer 5. Pump the tire to the specified tire pressure. # Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. Requirements: Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel and on the tire inflation compressor. # Remove sticker with the label 50 mph (80 km/h )from the tire inflation compressor housing and affix it to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. # Remove the tire inflation compressor from the storage space under the cargo compart‐ ment floor (/ page 339). R # # # # # # # R Pull filler hose 1 and plug 3 out of the tire inflation compressor housing. Insert plug 7 of filler hose 1 in the socket on the tire inflation compressor and then turn it until plug 7 engages. Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emer‐ gency spare wheel. Screw union nut 2 of filler hose 1 onto valve . Make sure on and off switch 4 of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0. Insert plug 3 in a socket in your vehicle. 12 V socket: (/ page 135) % The specified tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel. # When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on and off switch 4 on the tire inflation compressor to 0. The tire inflation compressor is switched off. # Press the start/stop button to switch off the power supply. # If the tire pressure is higher than the speci‐ fied pressure, press pressure release valve button 6 until the correct tire pressure has been reached. Wheels and tires 387 # # # # Unscrew union nut 2 of filler hose 1 from the valve. Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare wheel onto the valve again. Store filler hose 1 and plug 3 in the lower section of the tire inflation compressor hous‐ ing. Store the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle. Collapsible spare wheel Notes on the collapsible spare wheel & WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mount‐ ing an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteris‐ tics. To prevent hazardous situations: # # # # # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Never mount more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly. Do not switch off ESP®. >Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work‐ shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. The collapsible spare wheel is an emergency spare wheel which is only suitable for use for a limited period of time and in a restricted manner in the event of a flat tire (e.g. until the nearest workshop). The tire sidewalls are folded when in transport mode. Before use, the collapsible spare wheel has to be inflated with the accompanying com‐ pressor. Check the tire pressure of the collapsible spare wheel once installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. The maximum permissible speed with a collapsi‐ ble spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not install snow chains on the collapsible spare wheel. Replace the collapsible spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. % Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If a collapsible spare wheel is instal‐ led the tire pressure monitoring system can‐ not function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the collapsible spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 357) R Tire pressure table (/ page 359) 388 Wheels and tires Removing the collapsible spare wheel The collapsible spare wheel is located under the cargo compartment floor. # Observe the information on mounting tires (/ page 375). # Open the tailgate. # Open the cargo compartment floor . # Remove the collapsible spare wheel. Mercedes‑Maybach vehicles Without refrigerator box: The collapsible spare wheel is located in the collapsible spare wheel bag on the cargo compartment floor. # Observe the notes on mounting tires (/ page 375). # Open the cargo compartment. # Detach the securing straps. # Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the securing straps from the brackets. # Remove the collapsible spare wheel bag together with the collapsible spare wheel. # Open the collapsible spare wheel bag and remove the collapsible spare wheel. With refrigerator box: The collapsible spare wheel is located in the collapsible spare wheel bag inside the open cargo compartment floor. # Observe the information on mounting tires (/ page 375). # Open the cargo compartment. # Detach the securing straps. # Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the securing straps from the brackets. # Remove the collapsible spare wheel bag together with the collapsible spare wheel. # Open the collapsible spare wheel bag and remove the collapsible spare wheel. Inflating the collapsible spare wheel Requirements: R Mount the collapsible spare wheel as descri‐ bed (/ page 383). R Remove the tire inflation compressor from the storage well under the trunk floor (/ page 339). * NOTE Damage to the collapsible spare wheel when lowering the vehicle Lowering the vehicle without previously inflating the collapsible spare wheel can damage its rim. # Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tire inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. * NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐ tion compressor running too long # Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. Wheels and tires 389 # # # # # # # Pull connector 4 and the hose out of the housing. Unscrew the cap from the valve on the col‐ lapsible spare wheel. Screw union nut 1 of the hose onto the valve. Make sure on and off switch 3 of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0. Insert plug 4 into the cigarette lighter socket or into a 12 V socket (/ page 135) in your vehicle. Switch on the power supply (/ page 168). Press On/Off switch 3 on the tire inflation compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on manometer 2. Pump the tire to the specified tire pressure. % The specified tire pressure is printed on the yellow label of the collapsible spare wheel. # When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on/off switch 3 on the tire inflation compressor to 0. # If the tire pressure is higher than the speci‐ fied pressure, press pressure release valve button 5 until the correct tire pressure has been reached. 390 Technical data Notes on technical data Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle electronics Two-way radios Notes on installing two-way radios & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit‐ ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐ rect operation of two-way radios If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the on-board electronics, for example, if: R The tow-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna R If the exterior antenna is not correctly mounted or is not of low reflection This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior antenna installed at a qualified special‐ ist workshop. # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna. * NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐ mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out‐ put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions. Technical data 391 On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you install the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installing for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing. 1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear fenders On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table. Frequency band and maximum transmission output Frequency band Maximum transmis‐ sion output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm frequency band 420 - 450 MHz 35 W Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G) 10 W 392 Technical data The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for some wavebands. R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview Vehicle identification plate 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (USA only) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) Technical data 393 Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. Additional plates VIN in front of the front seat 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle). 1 Plate with information about emissions test‐ 1 VIN (vehicle identification number) ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California 2 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label at the lower edge of the windshield 394 Technical data Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. You could other‐ wise fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐ ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con‐ tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids. # Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers. # Always keep children away from operat‐ ing fluids. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ sponsible disposal # Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐ ronmentally responsible manner. Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating fluids is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. Fire, open flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle. # & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. Technical data 395 # # # # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapor. Keep children away from fuel. Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. Fuel Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with a gas‐ oline engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 394). * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the ignition. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐ fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the instruction label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 191). This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with unleaded regular gasoline with at least 87 AKI/ 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower RON. 396 Technical data * NOTE Premature wear caused by unlea‐ ded regular gasoline Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the engine to wear more quickly and impair lon‐ gevity and performance. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with unleaded regular gasoline and refill as soon as possible with unleaded pre‐ mium grade gasoline. # Do not drive at the maximum speed. # Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm. Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐ lowing locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R USA only: at http://www.mbusa.com Information on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 394). * NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen‐ ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Be sure to observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Tank content and reserve fuel Missing values were not yet available at the time of going to press. The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Capacity Model All models Total capacity 23.8 gal (90.0 liters) Model of which reserve fuel All models 2.4 gal (9.0 liters) Mercedes‑Maybach Total capacity All models Mercedes‑Maybach of which reserve fuel All models Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 394). Technical data 397 Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Quality and capacity of engine oil MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ tives # # # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica‐ tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals. Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. Do not use additives. Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals. Gasoline engines Engine oil specifica‐ tions GLS 450 4MATIC 229.51, 229.52, 229.61 229.71* GLS 580 4MATIC 229.52 229.61* case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes). To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi‐ cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. Mercedes-Maybach GLS 600 4MATIC: only use SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils. The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Replacement amount Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Mercedes‑Maybach Engine oil specifica‐ tions Mercedes-Maybach GLS 600 4MATIC 229.5 * Recommended for lowest possible fuel con‐ sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each Replacement amount GLS 450 4MATIC 8.9 qt (8.5 liters) GLS 580 4MATIC 10.0 qt (9.5 liters) Mercedes‑Maybach Replacement amount Mercedes-Maybach GLS 600 4MATIC 10.0 qt (9.5 liters) 398 Technical data Notes on brake fluid Coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 394). Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 394). & WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys‐ tem The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart‐ ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐ ant Only add coolant that has been pre‐ mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐ tection. Information on coolant is available at the fol‐ lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 310.1: At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop # * NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐ peratures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐ tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by Mercedes-Benz. Technical data 399 # Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐ ating Fluids 310.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system should be: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 °F (-45 °C)) Coolant capacity Model # Capacity GLS 450 4MATIC 20.0 US qt (18.9 liters) GLS 580 4MATIC 16.6 US qt (15.7 liters) Mercedes‑Maybach Capacity Mercedes-Maybach GLS 600 4MATIC 20.0 US qt (18.9 liters) Notes on windshield washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 394). & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam‐ age the plastic surface of the exterior light‐ ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which is also suitable for use on plastic surfa‐ ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐ Fit. * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐ terFit with other windshield washer flu‐ ids. Do not use distilled or de-ionized water as the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously. 400 Technical data Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa‐ tion on the antifreeze container. Mix the washer fluid with the windshield washer fluid all year round. Refrigerant Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 394). * NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger‐ ant If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli‐ mate control system may be damaged. # USA/China: Use only R‑134a refriger‐ ant. # Canada: Use only R‑1234yf refrigerant. * NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com‐ pressor oil # # Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger‐ ant compressor oil. Work on the climate control system may be car‐ ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand‐ ard J639, must be adhered to. The information label on the climate control sys‐ tem for the refrigerant type and the refrigerant compressor oil is located on the inside of the hood. Information label (example – USA/China) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (Global Warming Potential) of the refrig‐ erant used 6 Refrigerant type 1 2 3 4 5 Technical data 401 Refrigerant filling capacity Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil Model Refrigerant All models 23.9 ± 0.4 oz (680 ± 10 g) Model All models 1 2 3 4 5 6 Information label (example – Canada) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (Global Warming Potential) of the refrig‐ erant used Refrigerant type Symbols 1 indicate the following: Possible dangers R The need to have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop only R PAG oil 3.8 ± 0.4 oz (110 ± 10 g) Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment 402 Technical data Height when opened Model Vehicles with AIR‐ MATIC Vehicles with Offroad package Mercedes‑Maybach All models 1 Height when opened* 2 Head‐ room* *When the rear-end lowering is activated, the values are correspondingly lower. Vehicle dimensions All models 84.4 in 75.9 in (2144 mm) (1929 mm) - 87.9 in - 79.4 in (2234 mm) (2019 mm) Vehicle length 205.0 in (5207 mm) Vehicle length, AMG Styling 205.2 in (5213 mm) 84.4 in 75.9 in (2144 mm) (1929 mm) - 89.5 in - 81.0 in (2274 mm) (2059 mm) Vehicle width including out‐ side mirrors 84.9 in (2157 mm) Vehicle width excluding out‐ side mirrors, min. to max. 77.0 in (1956 mm) 79.9 in (2030 mm) Maximum vehicle height (AIR‐ MATIC) 74.3 in (1888 mm) Maximum vehicle height (Offroad package) 75.9 in (1928 mm) 1 Height when opened* 2 Head‐ room* 85.0 in 76.5 in (2159 mm) (1944 mm) - 87.9 in - 79.4 in (2234 mm) (2019 mm) All models Minimum vehicle height (high‐ way driving level) 71.7 in (1823 mm) 72.3 in (1838 mm) Wheelbase 123.4 in (3135 mm) Maximum ground clearance (AIRMATIC) 10.1 in (259 mm) Maximum ground clearance (Off-road package) 11.3 in (289 mm) Minimum ground clearance (AIRMATIC/Off-road package) 6.8 in (174 mm) Mercedes‑Maybach Vehicle length 204.9 in (5205 mm) Vehicle width including out‐ side mirrors 84.9 in (2157 mm) Technical data 403 Roof load Mercedes‑Maybach All models Vehicle width excluding out‐ side mirrors, min. to max. 79.9 in (2030 mm) Maximum vehicle height 74.3 in (1888 mm) Running board Minimum vehicle height (high‐ way driving level) 72.3 in (1838 mm) Maximum load Wheelbase 123.4 in (3135 mm) Maximum ground clearance 8.2 in (210 mm) Weights and loads Please note that for the specified vehicle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the curb weight and reduce the payload. Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg) All models 440 lb (200 kg) Off-road driving Fording depth * NOTE Damage caused by water when fording Water can enter the engine compartment and vehicle interior if: R you exceed the maximum permissible fording depth when driving through stand‐ ing water R a bow wave forms during fording R water accumulates during fording of flow‐ ing water # Do not exceed the maximum permissi‐ ble fording depth and drive slowly through the water. The specified value indicates the maximum per‐ missible fording depth for: R vehicles that are ready to drive R slow driving through standing water Driving through flowing water reduces the per‐ missible fording depth due to the accumulation of water. Observe the notes on off-road driving and ford‐ ing (/ page 176). 404 Technical data Model Off-road level 2 19.7 in (50 cm) Off-road level 3 23.6 in (60 cm) Mercedes‑Maybach Raised level Model 1 Fording depth Vehicles with AIRMATIC Raised level 19.7 in (50 cm) Vehicles with Off-road package Off-road level 1 19.7 in (50 cm) 1 Fording depth 1 Fording depth 19.7 in (50 cm) Angle of approach/departure The specified values are maximum values for vehicles that are ready to drive. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous ter‐ rain . Angle of approach/departure All models (vehi‐ cles without AMG Styling) 1 Front 2 Rear Normal level 23° 20° Raised level 27° 24° 23° 20° Vehicles with AIRMATIC* Vehicles with Off-road package Normal level Technical data 405 All models (vehi‐ cles without AMG Styling) 1 Front 2 Rear Off-road level 1 25° 22° Off-road level 2 27° Off-road level 3 All models (vehi‐ cles with AMG Styling) All models (vehi‐ cles with AMG Styling) 1 Front 2 Rear Off-road level 2 25° 24° 24° Off-road level 3 27° - 28° 25° - 26° 29° 26° 1 Front 2 Rear 1 Front 2 Rear Mercedes‑May‐ bach Normal level 24° 21° Raised level 27° 25° Vehicles with AIRMATIC *Depending on the tire size. Normal level 21° - 22° 20° - 21° Raised level 25° 24° Vehicles with Off-road package Normal level 21° - 22° 20° - 21° Off-road level 1 23° - 24° 22° - 23° Maximum gradient climbing ability The vehicle's gradient climbing ability depends on the weight distribution in the vehicle, the ter‐ rain conditions and the road surface conditions. The specified value applies when: R the vehicle is ready to drive R the LOW RANGE off-road gear of the trans‐ fer case is engaged R the road surfaces conditions and thus the traction are good A gradient climbing ability of 100% corresponds to an incline of 45°. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous ter‐ rain . Model Maximum gra‐ dient climbing ability Vehicles without Offroad package 80% Vehicles with Off-road package When LOW RANGE offroad gear is engaged 100% Mercedes‑Maybach All models Maximum gra‐ dient climbing ability 80% 406 Technical data Trailer hitch General notes on the trailer hitch Modifications to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissi‐ ble if a towing capacity is specified in your vehi‐ cle documents. Further information can be obtained at a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. Towing capacity The tongue weight is not included in the towing capacity. Model All models Mercedes‑Maybach All models Towing capacity, braked 7716.2 lbs (3500 kg) Towing capacity, braked 7716.2 lbs (3500 kg) Maximum tongue weight and load capacity * NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose. # The tongue weight must not be below 110.2 lb (50 kg). # Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight. * NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed. # Do not exceed the permissible load capacity. Observe the additional notes on load capacity . Tongue weight Model Maximum tongue weight All models 617.3 lbs (280 kg) Mercedes‑Maybach Maximum tongue weight All models 617.3 lbs (280 kg) Missing values were not yet available at the time of going to press. Load capacity Model Maximum load All models Mercedes‑Maybach Maximum load All models Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation) Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Technical data 407 Axle load Model All models Mercedes‑Maybach All models Axle load 4078.5 lbs (1850 kg) Axle load 408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Introduction Notes about display messages Display messages appear on the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐ plified in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the multifunction display. The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐ play messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes‐ sages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown: R Õ Further information R ¨ Hide display message With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Press the Õ symbol to show further infor‐ mation on the multifunction display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the P button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐ den. The multifunction display shows these dis‐ play messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified. Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the multifunction display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip‐ ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To exit the message memory: press the P button. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409 Occupant safety Display messages 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 37). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 6 * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 37). 6 * The corresponding window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 37). Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example) & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. # # # Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 47). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The front passenger airbag is enabled while the vehicle is in motion: R even when a child, a person of smaller stature or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag may deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a child restraint system facing to the rear on a seat with an ACTIVATED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur. # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 47). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps SmartKey Display messages Á Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey needs to be replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key Á * The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 69). Replace Key Battery Á Key Not Detected (white display message) * The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey (/ page 169). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413 Display messages Á Key Not Detected (red dis‐ play message) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle. If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 169). # Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual Á Don't Forget Your Key * SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 169). * A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. 414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Lights Display messages : Check Left Low Beam (example) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding light source is faulty. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty. : * The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. : * The light sensor is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator’s Manual Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415 Display messages : Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Headlamps Inoperative : * You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. : * You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position. : * The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the func‐ tions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Switch On Headlamps Switch Off Lights Intell. Light System Inoperative 416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 146). # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Update Successfully Completed * Installation of the software update has been successfully completed (/ page 290). Update Failed Software Remains Unchanged * An error occurred during installation of the software update (/ page 290). The previous software version remains in place. Update Failed * An error occurred during installation of the software update (/ page 290). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Make a Mercedes me call via the overhead control panel (/ page 304). d * You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart‐ Key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery (starting assistance). Running Boards Not Retracted Pay Attention to Excess Width of Vehicle * Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: the running boards are not retracted. R The running boards can be retracted via the multimedia system only when the vehicle is stationary (/ page 75). R The running boards and the side skirt must be free of dirt, ice and snow. Otherwise, they are unable to retract. Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting # # # Clean the running boards (/ page 332). Repeat the retraction of the running boards (/ page 74). If the running boards cannot be retracted again, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the running boards are not retracted, check the excess width of the vehicle. 418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages y Running Board Not Extended Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: the running boards are not extended. R The running boards extend only when the vehicle is stationary. R The running boards and the side skirt must be free of dirt, ice and snow. Otherwise, they are unable to extend. # # # Clean the running boards (/ page 332). Repeat the extension of the running boards (/ page 74). If the running boards fail to extend again, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the running boards are not extended, be particularly careful when getting in or out. Ù * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning. Ù * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired. Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual & WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # C ? Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * At least one door is open. # Close all doors. * The hood is open. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. # # # A Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Close the hood. * The tailgate is open. 420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. # Close the tailgate. LOW RANGE Only When Vehicle Is Stationary * One or more shifting conditions have not been met. # Stop the vehicle. # Engage neutral i. # Repeat the gear change. LOW RANGE Shift to Position N Briefly * One or more shifting conditions have not been met. # Engage neutral i. # Repeat the gear change. LOW RANGE Not in Drive Program "Sport" * You will not be able to select the LOW RANGE off-road gear if the drive program C or B is switched on. The drive program therefore automatically switches to A. # Select the LOW RANGE off-road gear (/ page 190). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions LOW RANGE Malfunction To Park, Apply Brake * The transfer case is malfunctioning. # Do not shift the transfer case. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. LOW RANGE Shifting Canceled Please Reactivate * The transfer case did not perform the gear change. # Repeat the gear change. # Ensure all shifting conditions are met (/ page 190). LOW RANGE Malfunction * The transfer case is malfunctioning. # Do not shift the transfer case! # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. LOW RANGE Stop Apply Parking Brake * The transfer case is malfunctioning. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Apply the electric parking brake. # Where necessary, also secure the vehicle against rolling away. # Engage park position j. LOW RANGE Max. Speed 6 mph * The maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) for the gear change has been exceeded. 422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Drive more slowly. Repeat the gear change. LOW RANGE Max. Speed 25 mph * The maximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) for the gear change has been exceeded. # Drive more slowly. # Repeat the gear change. Gearbox Protection Limit 18 mph Disable LOW RANGE * The oil temperature in the transfer case is too high. # In the on-road position, shift to HIGH RANGE. ¥ * The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 327). Check Washer Fluid Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423 Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times. * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 169). + * The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual * NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # # # ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant. Add coolant (/ page 326). Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. * The coolant is too hot. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. & WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. 424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # # ÿ 8 In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. Wait until the engine has cooled down. Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. * The fan motor is faulty. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Fuel Level Low 8 Gas Cap Loose * The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425 Transmission Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary * Park position j can be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary. Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i. To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Change the transmission position. # Start the engine. Apply Brake to Shift to D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k. Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' * You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position k. 426 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. # Select park position j when switching off the vehicle. N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away * While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral i has been engaged. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission position h or k. Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed. # When transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans‐ mission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Reversing Not Possible Service Required * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position k cannot be selected. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 427 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling * The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction * The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. 428 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Brakes Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 199). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec‐ tric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 199). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 199). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 429 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. To apply: Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 199). # To release: Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. # If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Can‐ ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the charge level is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery. 430 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To apply: switch the ignition off. The electric parking brake will be applied automatically. # If the electric parking brake is not to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 199). If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. # To release: If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 199). # If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 431 Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 199). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 199). # # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. Release the electric parking brake manually. 432 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages F (USA only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch on the ignition. ! (Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level * There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433 Display messages # Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual Driving systems Display messages é Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 261). # If necessary, take a break. 434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Function Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning. The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low. * NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behavior is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering. # # # # # # Drive on carefully. Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend. Avoid sudden steering movements. Drive on carefully. Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend. Avoid sudden steering movements. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435 Display messages Selected Level Not Available When Rear Fog Lamp On  Lowering Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You cannot select off-road level +3. # Switch off the rear fog lamp. * The vehicle level may be lowered for the following reasons: R You have selected a different drive program. R You have exceeded the speed limit. R You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button. R Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if an electrical connection has been correctly made, you have excee‐ ded the speed limit. R You have switched on the rear fog lamp in the off-road level +3. Á * Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. ä * At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning. The system is deactivated. Vehicle Rising Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph 436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behavior has changed significantly, the vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering. # # # # # # ä Reduce vehicle speed. Drive on carefully. Reduce the vehicle speed considerably before taking a curve. Avoid sudden steering movements. Continue driving carefully and do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If possible, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the ignition off and on again. If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * There is a serious malfunction affecting the hydraulics of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system. The system is deactivated. * NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics have changed significantly. Malfunction Stop # # # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐ cumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437 Display messages Á Drive More Slowly Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. # Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again. You are driving too quickly with a trailer or the trailer hitch socket is being used, e.g. for a rear cycle rack. Read the information on trailer operation. # Á * The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Á * Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level. # Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level. Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 222). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If necessary, clean the windshield in the camera's field of vision. # Check the tire pressure if necessary. Vehicle Rising Please Wait Compressor Is Cooling 438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Active Steering Assist Inoperative Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ø * Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 222). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions. Beginning Emergency Stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 226). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Depressing the brake or accelerator pedal R Pressing a steering-wheel button R Operating Touch Control R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. Active Steering Assist is available once more. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 267). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 227). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist is deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 264). # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. 440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Manual * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable. # Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message. Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 264). # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Blind Spot Asst. Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Manual * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable. # Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message. Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. 442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ç Ã Ä ¸ Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: R dirt on the sensors R heavy rain or snow R extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors (/ page 332). # Restart the engine. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443 Display messages _ Ã Ä à á Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the windshield in front of the camera % Condensation detected on the windshield will be automatically removed using a built-in heater within approx‐ imately 12 minutes. Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield if necessary. Currently Unavailable Camera View Restricted ë Off * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 228). 444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages î Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Inoperative î * The Downhill Speed Regulation is not available in the currently selected drive program. # Change the drive program (/ page 182). î * The maximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) for the Downhill Speed Regulation has been exceeded. # Drive more slowly. ç * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 218). Not in Curr. Drive Prog. Max. Speed 25 mph - - - mph Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445 Display messages ç Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 216). Suspended ç * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 218). Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 216). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Active Distance Assist Inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Distance Assist Now Available * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (/ page 218). Off 446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ¯ Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 213). - - - mph Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 212). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447 Driving safety systems Display messages ! ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. 448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. * ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages T ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 207). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451 Display messages Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is malfunctioning. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes me connect Display messages Mercedes me connect Services Limited See Operator's Manual G Inoperative Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle functions for malfunction detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 27). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Battery Display messages # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual # See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine is off and the charge level is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. To charge the battery: Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance. * If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # * The battery is not being charged. * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # # # # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453 Display messages # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low. * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # # # # # # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐ cumstances. Switch off the engine. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. 454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Û Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. Convenience functions may be restricted. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery… * The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the ignition while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the Engine Can Now Be Started display message will be shown on the multifunction display. # Start the engine. # Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle. If the Engine Can Now Be Started display message does not appear after a few minutes: Try to start the engine again. # If the engine does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual * The charge level of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the engine. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Engine Can Now Be Started Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connec‐ tion point of the 12 V battery (/ page 347). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle. * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter. # Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery. Tire pressure monitor Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensor are being received. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on. The tire pressure monitor will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative * The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing h Check Tires Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. * There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec‐ ted tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position will be displayed. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure (/ page 357) and the tires. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457 Display messages h Please Correct Tire Pressure h Warning Tire Malfunction Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 362). * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire R R The tires can overheat and cause a fire. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Do not drive on with a flat tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires. # Notes on flat tires (/ page 338). Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires. # Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. 458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Engine oil Display messages 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # 5 When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 325). Notes on engine oil (/ page 396). * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too high. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level # # 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # # # # # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch off the engine. Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 325). Check the engine oil level. 460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Notes on engine oil (/ page 396). * Display message only for certain engines: The oil pressure is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure # # # 5 Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been star‐ ted or during a journey. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461 Instrument Display 8 F ! ! Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the Instrument Display may differ from the example shown. Indicator and warning lamps: Restraint system (/ page 462) 6 Seat belt (/ page 462) ü Ù Electric power steering (/ page 463) ÿ Coolant temperature (/ page 464) Check Engine (/ page 464) ; Electrical malfunction (/ page 464) # $ J L ä ! ÷ å h T L K Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca‐ tion indicator (/ page 464) USA: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 467) Canada: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 467) Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 467) USA: brakes (red) (/ page 467) Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 467) Distance warning (/ page 469) AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CON‐ TROL (/ page 469) ABS (/ page 470) ESP® (/ page 470) ESP® OFF (/ page 470) Tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 472) Parking lamps (/ page 143) Low beam (/ page 143) High beam (/ page 144) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 144) Rear fog lamp (/ page 143) R 462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Occupant safety Warning/indicator lamp 6 Restraint system warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 37). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # # 7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes Drive on carefully. Note the messages on the multifunction display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. * The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt(/ page 41). * There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463 Warning/indicator lamp 7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red seat belt warning lamp will light up for six seconds once the engine has started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. *The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 41). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp Ù Electric power steering warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red electric power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # # Note the messages on the multifunction display. 464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Engine Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Coolant warning lamp The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty ÿ If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature. & WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. # # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Note the messages on the multifunction display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. or # # # # ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp # Electrical malfunction warn‐ ing lamp Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. Check the coolant level (/ page 326). Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red area. The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. * There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. 466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. *There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak‐ ing. # Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467 Brakes Warning/indicator lamp F Electric parking brake indi‐ cator lamp (red) (USA only) ! Electric parking brake indi‐ cator lamp (red) (Canada only) ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp also lights up in the event of a malfunction. * # Note the messages on the multifunction display. 468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp $ Brake warning lamp (USA only) J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469 Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp L Warning lamp for distance warning function Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. * The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 207). ä The yellow AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. * A fault has occurred in the AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. ä The red E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. *There is a fault in the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL. Suspension warning lamp (yellow) Suspension warning lamp (red) * NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics have changed significantly. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. 470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # Note the messages on the multifunction display. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. & WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471 Warning/indicator lamp ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. * One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 203). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. å ESP® OFF warning lamp The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative. 472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires. # If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 203). Tire pressure monitor Warning/indicator lamp h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. *The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. *The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure and the tires. 474 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC ..................................................... 191 Function ............................................... 191 12 V battery see Battery (vehicle) 12 V socket see Socket (12 V) 48 V on-board electrical system Operating safety .................................... 25 115 V socket see Socket (115 V) 360° Camera ........................................... 252 Function .............................................. 252 Opening the camera cover (rear view camera) ............................................... 255 Selecting a view .................................. 255 A A/C function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ timedia system) ................................... 160 Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 160 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............. 203 Acceleration see Kickdown Accident and breakdown manage‐ ment Mercedes me connect ......................... 303 Acoustic locking verification signal Activating/deactivating ......................... 68 Active Blind Spot Assist ......................... 264 Activating/deactivating ....................... 267 Brake application ................................. 266 Function .............................................. 264 System limitations ............................... 264 Trailer operation .................................. 266 Active Brake Assist Function/notes ................................... 207 Setting ................................................. 211 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ......... 216 Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 226 Active Lane Change Assist .................. 224 Calling up a speed ............................... 218 Function ............................................... 216 Increasing/decreasing speed .............. 218 Requirements ...................................... 218 Route-based speed adaptation ............ 221 Steering wheel buttons ........................ Storing a speed .................................... Switching off/deactivating .................. Switching on/activating ....................... System limitations ............................... Active Emergency Stop Assist ............... Active Lane Change Assist ..................... Activating/deactivating ....................... Function .............................................. Active Lane Keeping Assist .................... Activating/deactivating ....................... Activating/deactivating the warning ... Function .............................................. Setting the sensitivity .......................... System limits ....................................... Trailer operation .................................. Active Parking Assist .............................. Cross Traffic Alert ............................... Drive Away Assist ................................ Exiting a parking space ....................... Function .............................................. Maneuvering assistance ...................... Parking ................................................ System limitations ............................... 218 218 218 218 216 226 224 226 224 267 269 269 267 269 267 267 255 260 260 258 255 261 257 255 Index 475 Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS Active Speed Limit Assist ....................... Display ................................................ Function .............................................. Active Steering Assist ............................. Activating/deactivating ....................... Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. Active Lane Change Assist .................. Function .............................................. System limits ....................................... Active Traffic Jam Assist Activating/deactivating ....................... Function .............................................. Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function .............................................. Switching on/off ................................. Additional cushion Leg rest ............................................... Rear passenger compartment head restraint ............................................... 220 220 220 222 224 226 224 222 222 227 227 146 147 100 106 Additives .................................................. 396 Engine oil ............................................ 396 Fuel ..................................................... 396 Additives (engine oil) see Additives Additives (fuel) see Fuel ADS PLUS damping system see AIRMATIC After-sales service center see ASSYST PLUS Air bag Reduced protection ............................... 44 Air conditioning menu Calling up ............................................ 160 Air distribution Setting ................................................. 159 Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ...... 161 Air freshener system see Perfume atomizer Air inlet see Air-water duct Air pressure see Tire pressure Air suspension see AIRMATIC Air vents ................................................... 165 Adjusting (front) .................................. 165 Adjusting (rear) .................................... 165 Glove box ............................................. 167 Air vents see Air vents Air-conditioning system see Climate control Air-recirculation mode ............................ 162 Air-water duct .......................................... 328 Keeping free ........................................ 328 Airbag ......................................................... 42 Activation .............................................. 37 Cushionbag ........................................... 42 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .... 42 Installation locations ............................. 42 Knee airbag ........................................... 42 Overview ............................................... 42 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 47 476 Index Protection .............................................. 43 Side airbag ............................................ 42 Window curtain airbag ........................... 42 Airflow Setting ................................................. 159 AIRMATIC ................................................. 229 Setting ................................................. 231 Suspension .......................................... 229 Alarm see Panic alarm Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) All-wheel drive see 4MATIC Ambient lighting Setting (multimedia system) ................ 149 Android Auto see Smartphone integration® Animals Pets in the vehicle ................................. 66 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft protection Immobilizer ............................................ 90 Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Apple CarPlay see Smartphone integration® Assistance systems see Driving safety system ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 321 Battery disconnection periods ............. 322 Displaying the service due date ........... 321 Function/notes ................................... 321 Regular maintenance work .................. 321 Special service requirements .............. 321 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) .................. 90 Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor ....................................... 92 Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm ..................................................... 92 Deactivating the alarm ........................... 91 Function ................................................ 90 Function of the interior motion sensor .. 92 The tow-away alarm function ................. 91 ATTENTION ASSIST .......................... 261, 262 Function ............................................... 261 Setting ................................................. 262 System limitations ............................... 261 Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic car wash mode Activating ............................................ 330 Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Automatic driving lights ......................... 144 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .......................................... 179 Index 477 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function) .......................................... 179 Automatic front passenger front air‐ bag shutoff ........................................... 45, 47 Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff .............. 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 47 Automatic front passenger front air‐ bag shutoff see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Automatic measures after an accident ... 51 Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating ....................... 157 Automatic seat adjustment Setting ................................................. 107 Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 185 Drive program display .......................... 184 Drive programs .................................... 182 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 182 Engaging drive position ........................ 187 Engaging neutral .................................. 186 Engaging park position ........................ 186 Engaging reverse gear ......................... Kickdown ............................................. Manual gearshifting ............................. Steering wheel paddle shifters ............ Transmission position display .............. Transmission positions ........................ Axle load Towing a trailer .................................... 186 188 187 187 185 185 406 B Back seat see Third row of seats Bag hook ................................................... 131 Baidu CarLife see Smartphone integration® Ball neck Installing .............................................. 271 BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................... 203 Battery SmartKey ............................................... 69 Battery see Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle) ...................................... Charging .............................................. Charging (Remote Online) .................... Notes .................................................. Notes (starting assistance and charging) ............................................. Replacing ............................................ Starting assistance .............................. Belt see Seat belt Blind see Roller sunblind Blind Spot Assist ..................................... Activating/deactivating ....................... Function .............................................. System limitations ............................... Blower see Climate control Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Notes .................................................. 348 347 170 343 345 348 347 264 267 264 264 398 478 Index Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) ..................................................... 207 Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 203 Active Brake Assist .............................. 207 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 203 Driving tips .......................................... 173 EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) ..................................................... 207 HOLD function ..................................... 228 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads) .................................................. 173 New/replaced brakepads/brake discs .................................................... 171 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 171 Post-collision brake ................................ 51 Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdown Changing a wheel ................................ 379 Overview of the help functions .............. 18 Roadside Assistance .............................. 24 Tow-starting ........................................ 353 Towing away ........................................ 350 Transporting the vehicle ...................... 351 Breakdown see Flat tire Buttons Steering wheel ..................................... 276 C Calls Mercedes me ...................................... Camera ..................................................... Camera see 360° Camera see Rear view camera Car key see SmartKey Car wash see Care Car wash (care) ....................................... Car-to-X-Communication Displaying hazard warnings ................. Care .......................................................... Air-water duct ...................................... 304 239 328 298 334 328 Automatic car wash ............................. Carpet ................................................. Decorative foil ..................................... Display ................................................ Exterior lighting ................................... Headliner ............................................. Paintwork ............................................ Plastic trim .......................................... Power washer ...................................... Real wood/trim elements ................... Rear view camera ................................ Running boards ................................... Seat belts ............................................ Seat cover ........................................... Sensors ............................................... Surround view camera ........................ Tailpipes .............................................. Trailer hitch ......................................... Washing by hand ................................. Wheels/rims ....................................... Windows .............................................. Wiper blades ....................................... Cargo compartment cover Extending/retracting ........................... Notes ................................................... 328 334 332 334 332 334 331 334 330 334 332 332 334 334 332 332 332 332 331 332 332 332 128 128 Index 479 Removing/installing ............................ 128 Cargo compartment floor Locking/unlocking .............................. 132 Cargo tie-down rings ............................... 131 Carpet (Care) ........................................... 334 Change of address .................................... 25 Change of ownership ................................ 25 Changing a wheel Preparation .......................................... 379 Raising the vehicle .............................. 380 Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel Changing gears ........................................ 187 Manually .............................................. 187 Changing hub caps .................................. 379 Charging Battery (vehicle) .................................. 347 Mobile phone (wireless) ....................... 139 USB port .............................................. 137 Child safety lock Rear doors ............................................. 64 Rear side windows ................................. 65 Child seat Attaching (notes) ................................... 55 Basic instructions .................................. 51 Front-passenger seat (notes) ................. 62 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing) ............ 57 Notes on risks and dangers ................... 52 Securing on the front passenger seat .... 63 Securing on the rear seat ...................... 61 Top Tether .............................................. 60 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle ............. 52 Basic instructions .................................. 51 Special seat belt retractor ..................... 56 Chock ........................................................ 378 Storage location .................................. 378 Chock see Chock Cleaning see Care Climate control ........................................ 159 Activating/deactivating ....................... 160 Activating/deactivating (rear operat‐ ing unit) ............................................... 160 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel) ....................... Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system) ... Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ nization function (control panel) .......... Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ nization function (MBUX multimedia system) ................................................ Air-recirculation mode ......................... Automatic control ................................ Automatically controlling (rear oper‐ ating unit) ............................................ Calling up the air conditioning menu ... Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control .................................... Control panel for dual-zone auto‐ matic climate control ........................... Defrosting the windshield .................... Filling capacity for PAG oil ................... Front air vents ..................................... Glove box air vent ................................ Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐ grance system) .................................... Ionization ............................................. Note .................................................... 160 160 162 162 162 161 161 160 159 159 159 401 165 167 163 163 159 480 Index Rear air vents ...................................... 165 Rear operating unit .............................. 160 Refrigerant .......................................... 400 Refrigerant filling capacity ................... 401 Removing condensation from the windows .............................................. 162 Residual heat ....................................... 162 Residual heat (rear operating unit) ...... 163 Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 160 Setting the air distribution ................... 159 Setting the airflow ............................... 159 Setting the fragrance system ............... 163 Setting the temperature ...................... 159 Switching the rear window heater on/off ................................................. 159 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening) ................................................ 83 Windshield heater ................................ 164 Coat hook ................................................. 132 Cockpit ......................................................... 6 Overview ................................................. 6 Coffee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST Collapsible spare wheel .......................... 387 Inflating ............................................... 388 Notes ................................................... 387 Removing ............................................ 388 Collision detection (parked vehicle) ...... 200 Combination switch ................................ 144 Computer see On-board computer Consumption indicator Calling up ............................................ 185 Convenience closing feature .................... 83 Convenience opening ................................ 83 Coolant (engine) Capacity .............................................. 399 Check level .......................................... 326 Notes .................................................. 398 Cooling see Climate control Copyrights License .................................................. 34 Trademarks ............................................ 35 Cornering light ......................................... 146 Cross Traffic Alert ................................... 260 Crosswind Assist Function/notes ................................... 206 Cruise control .......................................... 212 Buttons ................................................ 213 Calling up a speed ............................... 213 Function ............................................... 212 Requirements: ..................................... 213 Selecting .............................................. 213 Setting a speed .................................... 213 Storing a speed .................................... 213 Switching off ........................................ 213 Switching on ........................................ 213 System limitations ............................... 212 Cup holder Switching the cooling/heating func‐ tion on/off .......................................... 133 Cushionbag ................................................ 42 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ......... 29 Customer Relations Department ............. 29 Index 481 D Dashboard see Cockpit Data acquisition Vehicle ................................................... 31 Data storage Electronic control units .......................... 31 Online services ...................................... 33 Vehicle ................................................... 31 Daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lights Daytime running lights ........................... 147 Switching on/off ................................. 147 Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 91 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity Wireless vehicle components ................ 27 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions) ................................................................... 332 Definitions (tires and loading) ................ 372 Destination entry .................................... 295 Entering a POI or address .................... 295 Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection ............................ 27 Digital Operator's Manual ........................ 20 Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 185 Engaging drive position ........................ 187 Engaging neutral .................................. 186 Engaging park position ........................ 186 Engaging park position automatically .. 186 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 186 Function .............................................. 185 Display (Care) .......................................... 334 Display (MBUX multimedia system) Home screen ....................................... 282 Display (multimedia system) ................. 283 Operating ............................................ 283 Display (on-board computer) Displays on the multifunction display .. 278 Display message ..................................... Calling up (on-board computer) ........... Notes .................................................. Display messages ¯ - - - mph ..................................... ç - - - mph ..................................... # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual ................................................ Û 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual ................................................ : Active Headlamps Inoperative .... é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative ............................................................. é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! .................................................. : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative ........................................... $ Check Brake Fluid Level ............. # Check Brake Pads See Opera‐ tor's Manual ........................................ 408 408 408 446 444 452 454 415 433 433 414 432 433 482 Index + Check Coolant Level See Oper‐ ator's Manual ...................................... 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) .................................................. : Check Left Low Beam (exam‐ ple) ....................................................... h Check Tires ................................ ¥ Check Washer Fluid ................... Á Compressor Is Cooling ............... ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off .................................... _ Currently Unavailable Camera View Restricted ................................... ç Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty ...................................... ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ............................... ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual .............................. Á Don't Forget Your Key ................. 423 458 414 456 422 437 423 443 442 447 448 413 Á Drive More Slowly ...................... 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured ............................................ 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi‐ cle Turn Engine Off .............................. 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine ................................ 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level ........ 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) ............................. 8 Fuel Level Low ............................ 8 Gas Cap Loose ........................... ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ T Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ G Inoperative ................................. î Inoperative ................................. 437 460 459 460 459 409 424 424 448 449 450 451 444 : Intell. Light System Inoperative .. 415 Á Key Not Detected (red display message) ............................................. 413 Á Key Not Detected (white dis‐ play message) ...................................... 412 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal‐ function Service Required (example) ... 409  Lowering .................................... 435 ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph ............................................. 434, 435 : Malfunction See Operator’s Manual ................................................. 414 î Max. Speed 25 mph ................... 444 î Not in Curr. Drive Prog. .............. 444 Á Obtain a New Key ....................... 412 ç Off .............................................. 445 ë Off .............................................. 443 F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual ................................................ 428 h Please Correct Tire Pressure ...... 457 Index 483 F Please Release Parking Brake ..... Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Bat‐ tery… ................................................... Á Replace Key Battery .................... y Running Board Not Extended ...... # See Operator's Manual .............. 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required .............................................. Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Man‐ ual ........................................................ Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual .... # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run‐ ning ..................................................... # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual ................................................ ç Suspended ................................. : Switch Off Lights ........................ : Switch On Headlamps ................ 431 454 412 418 452 409 418 418 453 453 445 415 415 F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake ................................ d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting .............. Á Vehicle Rising Please Wait .......... Á Vehicle Rising ............................. h Warning Tire Malfunction ........... h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing ............ Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual .... Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative .... Active Blind Spot Asst. Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Opera‐ tor's Manual ........................................ Active Brake Assist Functions Cur‐ rently Limited See Operator's Man‐ ual ....................................................... Active Brake Assist Functions Limi‐ ted See Operator's Manual .................. 432 417 437 435 457 456 440 440 441 450 451 Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual .... Active Distance Assist Inoperative ...... Active Distance Assist Now Available ............................................................. Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐ tive ...................................................... Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐ tor's Manual ........................................ Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... Active Steering Assist Inoperative ....... Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer‐ gency Stops ......................................... Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... 445 445 445 439 439 441 437 438 438 439 484 Index Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual ........................ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera‐ tive ....................................................... Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' ............... Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' ................... Apply Brake to Shift to D or R .............. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction .............. Beginning Emergency Stop .................. Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual .................. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative ............... Blind Spot Assist Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Man‐ ual ....................................................... Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual ................................................ Cruise Control Inoperative .................. 439 416 416 425 425 425 427 438 439 440 440 454 446 Cruise Control Off ............................... Decrease Speed .................................. Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away .. Engine Can Now Be Started ................ Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual ............................... Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual ............................... Gearbox Protection Limit 18 mph Disable LOW RANGE ............................ Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc‐ tioning .................................................. LOW RANGE Malfunction ..................... LOW RANGE Malfunction To Park, Apply Brake ......................................... LOW RANGE Max. Speed 6 mph .......... LOW RANGE Max. Speed 25 mph ........ LOW RANGE Not in Drive Program "Sport" ................................................ 446 458 426 455 410 410 422 416 421 421 421 422 420 LOW RANGE Only When Vehicle Is Stationary ............................................ LOW RANGE Shift to Position N Briefly .................................................. LOW RANGE Shifting Canceled Please Reactivate ................................ LOW RANGE Stop Apply Parking Brake ................................................... Mercedes me connect Services Limi‐ ted See Operator's Manual .................. N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away ................................................... Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐ tionary ................................................. Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual ........................ PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual ........................ PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera‐ tor's Manual ......................................... 420 420 421 421 451 426 425 413 411 411 Index 485 Reversing Not Possible Service Required .............................................. Running Boards Not Retracted Pay Attention to Excess Width of Vehicle .... Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer .......................................... Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling ................... Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable .......................................... Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative ........... Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors .................................... Tires Overheated ................................. To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine .................................. To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec‐ onds or press 3 times. ......................... 426 417 426 427 455 455 456 457 425 423 Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail‐ able See Operator's Manual ................ 441 Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative ............. 441 Transmission Malfunction Stop ........... 426 Update Failed ....................................... 416 Update Failed Software Remains Unchanged ........................................... 416 Update Successfully Completed .......... 416 Display on the windshield see Head-up Display Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Door Child safety lock (rear doors) ................ 64 Locking (emergency key) ....................... 73 Opening (from the inside) ...................... 70 Power closing function .......................... 73 Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 73 Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 70 Door control panel ..................................... 14 Door control panel (rear passenger compartment) ............................................ 16 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ... 368 Downhill driving assistance see DSR Drawbar see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving ................................ 173 Drive Away Assist .................................... 260 Drive Away Assist see Protection against collision Drive position Inserting .............................................. 187 Drive program display ............................. 184 Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver's seat see Seat Driving safety system ............................. 201 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 203 Active Brake Assist .............................. 207 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 203 486 Index Cameras .............................................. EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) ..................................................... ESP® Crosswind Assist ........................ ESP® trailer stabilization ..................... Off-road ABS ....................................... Overview ............................................. Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. Responsibility ...................................... STEER CONTROL ................................. Driving system see 360° Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see AIRMATIC see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system 201 207 206 206 203 202 201 201 207 see DSR see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Traffic Sign Assist Driving tips Drinking and driving ............................. General driving tips .............................. Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST DSR ........................................................... Activating/deactivating ....................... Changing the target speed ................... Function ............................................... Notes ................................................... Switching on/off ................................. Dynamic handling control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... Configuring drive program I ................. Displaying engine data ........................ Displaying vehicle data ........................ Drive program display .......................... Drive programs .................................... Function .............................................. Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch) ............................................................. Selecting the drive program ................ 173 173 171 214 215 216 214 214 215 182 184 185 184 E E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL ...................... Individual wheel control ....................... Recovery mode ................................... Setting the level ................................... Suspension .......................................... E10 ............................................................ Easy entry feature Function/notes .................................... Easy exit feature Function/notes .................................... EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) Function/notes ................................... ECO Assist Function/notes .................................... 184 182 182 184 184 236 240 239 240 236 395 114 114 207 181 Index 487 ECO display Function .............................................. 180 ECO start/stop function ......................... 179 Automatic engine start ........................ 179 Automatic engine stop ......................... 179 Method of operation ............................ 179 Switching off/on ................................. 180 Electric parking brake ............................. 198 Applying automatically ........................ 198 Applying or releasing manually ............ 199 Emergency braking .............................. 199 Releasing automatically ....................... 199 Electrohydraulic suspension see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided) ....................... 337 Overview of the help functions .............. 18 Reflective safety vest .......................... 336 Removing the warning triangle ............ 336 Setting up the warning triangle ........... 337 Emergency braking ................................. 199 Emergency braking see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency call system see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Emergency engine start ......................... 353 Emergency key Locking a door ....................................... 73 Unlocking a door ................................... 73 Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle ............................. 169 Emergency release Tailgate .................................................. 80 Emergency spare wheel ......................... 385 Inflating ............................................... 386 Notes .................................................. 385 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation .............................................. 37 Engine ECO start/stop function ...................... 179 Engine number .................................... 392 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 169 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 171 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 169 Starting assistance .............................. 347 Switching off (start/stop button) ......... 194 Engine data Displaying ............................................ 185 Engine number ........................................ 392 Engine oil ................................................. 325 Additives ............................................. 396 Capacity .............................................. 397 Checking the oil level using the onboard computer ................................... 324 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ............... 397 Quality ................................................. 397 Topping up ........................................... 325 Entering/exiting level Setting ................................................. 234 EQ boost Operating safety .................................... 25 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® Crosswind Assist ................................. 206 Trailer stabilization .............................. 206 488 Index ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ...... 203 Activating/deactivating ....................... 205 Function/notes ................................... 203 Extendable running boards ....................... 74 Extendable step see Running boards Exterior lighting see Lights Exterior lighting (Care) ........................... 332 Exterior mirrors ............................... 155, 156 Anti-glare mode (automatic) ................ 156 Automatic mirror folding function ........ 157 Folding in/out ..................................... 155 Operating the memory function ........... 115 Parking position ................................... 156 Setting ................................................. 155 F Fatigue detection see ATTENTION ASSIST First-aid kit (soft sided) .......................... 337 Flacon Inserting/removing ............................. 163 Flat tire ..................................................... 338 Changing a wheel ................................ 379 MOExtended tires ................................ 338 Notes .................................................. 338 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 339 Flat towing see Tow-bar system Floor mats ................................................ 141 Foil covering Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 201 Folding table ............................................ 122 Fragrance see Perfume atomizer Free driving mode Starting ............................................... 243 Free software ............................................ 34 Frequencies Two-way radio ...................................... 391 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ..... 42 Front passenger seat ................................ 96 Adjusting from the driver's seat ............ 96 Adjusting from the rear passenger compartment ......................................... 97 Front passenger seat see Seat Fuel ........................................................... 396 Additives ............................................. 396 E10 ...................................................... 395 Fuel reserve ........................................ 396 Gasoline .............................................. 395 Quality (gasoline) ................................ 395 Refueling .............................................. 191 Sulfur content ..................................... 395 Tank content ....................................... 396 Function seat see Door control panel Function seat (rear passenger com‐ partment) see Seat (rear passenger compartment) Fuses ........................................................ 353 Before replacing a fuse ........................ 353 Dashboard fuse box ............................ 355 Fuse assignment diagram ................... 353 Fuse box in the cargo compartment .... 355 Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 354 Index 489 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐ well ...................................................... 355 Notes .................................................. 353 Fuses see Fuses G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ........................... 197 Opening or closing the door ................ 197 Programming buttons .......................... 195 Resolving problems ............................. 197 Synchronizing the rolling code ............. 197 Gasoline ................................................... 395 Gasoline station prices ........................... 298 Gearshift recommendation .................... 188 Genuine parts ............................................ 23 Glide mode ............................................... 189 Glove box Air vent ................................................ 167 H Handbrake see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 356 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 78 Handset Stowage compartment ........................ 123 Hazard warning lights ............................. 145 Hazardous substances Information ............................................ 25 Head restraint Attaching/removing the supplemen‐ tary cushion ........................................ 106 EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint (front) .................................................. 104 Front (adjusting mechanically) ............. 103 Front (luxury head restraint) ................ 104 Rear (installing/removing) ................... 106 Rear passenger compartment (adjusting) ........................................... 105 Rear passenger compartment (luxury head restraint) ..................................... 106 Head-up Display ...................................... Adjusting display elements (on-board computer) ............................................ Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer) ............................................ Function .............................................. Menu (on-board computer) .................. Operating the memory function ........... Setting the position (on-board com‐ puter) .................................................. Switching on/off ................................. Headlamps see Automatic driving lights Headliner (care) ....................................... Heating see Climate control High beam Activating/deactivating ....................... HIGH RANGE Shifting ................................................ High-beam flasher ................................... High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 279 279 279 278 279 115 279 280 334 144 190 144 146 490 Index Hill start assist ........................................ HOLD function ......................................... Function/notes ................................... Switching on/off ................................. Home screen (media display) Overview ............................................. Hood Opening/closing ................................. 227 228 228 228 282 322 I Identification plate Engine ................................................. 392 Refrigerant .......................................... 400 Vehicle ................................................ 392 Ignition Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 168 Ignition key see SmartKey Immobilizer ................................................ 90 Indicator lamps see Warning/indicator lamps Individual drive program Configuring .......................................... 184 Selecting ............................................. 184 Inside rearview mirror see Exterior mirrors Inspection see ASSYST PLUS Instrument cluster Function/notes ............................ 274, 275 Instrument Display Function/notes ................................... 275 Instrument cluster ................................. 10 Warning/indicator lamps .................... 460 Instrument Display and on-board computer Function/notes .................................... 274 Intelligent Light System Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 146 Cornering light ..................................... 146 Interior lighting ....................................... 148 Ambient lighting .................................. 149 Reading light ........................................ 148 Setting ................................................. 148 Switch-off delay time ........................... 149 Interior motion sensor Activating/deactivating ......................... 92 Function ................................................ 92 Internet radio see TuneIn Ionization Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ timedia system) ................................... 163 iPhone® see Smartphone integration® J Jack Storage location .................................. 378 Jump-start connection ............................ 347 General notes ...................................... 345 K KEYLESS-GO Locking the vehicle ................................ Problem ................................................. Unlocking setting .................................. Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 71 72 68 71 Index 491 Kickdown ................................................. 188 Using ................................................... 188 Knee airbag ................................................ 42 L Labeling (tires) see Tire labeling Lamp see Interior lighting Lamps (Instrument Display) see Warning/indicator lamps Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur‐ ing system Installing ................................................ 57 Leg rest Attaching/removing the additional cushion ................................................ 100 Level control system see AIRMATIC see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Light switch Overview ............................................. Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights Lights ........................................................ Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... Automatic driving lights ....................... Combination switch ............................. Cornering light ..................................... Hazard warning lights .......................... High beam ........................................... High-beam flasher ............................... Light switch ......................................... Low-beam headlamps ......................... Parking lights ....................................... Rear fog lamp ...................................... Responsibility for lighting systems ...... Setting the exterior lighting switchoff delay time ....................................... Standing lights ..................................... Switching the surround lighting on/off ................................................. Turn signal light ................................... 143 143 146 144 144 146 145 144 144 143 143 143 143 143 147 143 148 144 Limited Warranty Vehicle ................................................... 31 Limiting the opening angle (tailgate) ...... 80 Live Traffic Information Switching the traffic information dis‐ play on ................................................ 298 Load index (tires) .................................... 370 Load protection net Attaching ............................................. 130 Load-bearing capacity (tires) ................. 370 Loading ..................................................... 131 Bag hook .............................................. 131 Cargo tie-down rings ............................ 131 Coat hook ............................................ 132 Definitions ........................................... 372 Notes ................................................... 119 Roof luggage rack ................................ 133 Loading guidelines ................................... 119 Loading information table ...................... 363 Loads Securing ............................................... 119 492 Index Locking/unlocking Activating/deactivating the auto‐ matic locking feature ............................. 72 Emergency key ...................................... 73 KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 71 Opening the tailgate .............................. 75 Unlocking and opening doors from the inside .............................................. 70 LOW RANGE Shifting ................................................ 190 Low-beam headlamps Switching on/off ................................. 143 Lowering the vehicle Rear of the vehicle .............................. 235 Lubricant additives see Additives Luggage Securing ............................................... 119 Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way) Lumbar support (4-way) ........................... 98 M MAGIC VISION CONTROL Windshield wipers ............................... 153 Maintenance Vehicle ................................................... 24 Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction Restraint system .................................... 37 Malfunction message see Display message Map ........................................................... 297 Displaying online map contents .......... 298 Displaying weather information ........... 298 Moving ................................................. 297 Selecting the map orientation ............. 297 Setting the map scale .......................... 297 Switching freeway information on/off ................................................. 297 Massage program Overview ............................................. 108 Resetting the settings .......................... 109 Massage programs Selecting the front seats ..................... Massage settings Resetting ............................................. Maximum load rating .............................. Maximum permissible load Calculation example ............................ Determining ........................................ Maximum tire pressure .......................... MBUX Interior Assistant Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off contact-free ......................................... Switching the search light for the driver on/off ....................................... MBUX Interior Assistant (multimedia system) .................................................... Overview ............................................. MBUX multimedia system ...................... Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... Configuring drive program I ................. Notes ................................................... 109 109 369 365 364 369 286 286 285 285 281 201 184 281 Index 493 Overview .............................................. 281 Setting route-based speed adapta‐ tion ...................................................... 222 Setting the rear climate control ........... 161 Standby mode function ....................... 200 Mechanical key Inserting/removing ............................... 69 Unlocking the tailgate ........................... 80 Media Overview of the functions and sym‐ bols ...................................................... 313 Media mode Connecting Bluetooth® audio equip‐ ment .................................................... 314 Medical aids ............................................... 29 Memory function Head-up Display — Calling up stored settings ................................................ 115 Head-up Display — Storing settings ...... 115 Operating ............................................. 115 Outside mirrors — Calling up stored settings ................................................ 115 Outside mirrors — Storing settings ....... 115 Seat — Calling up stored settings ......... 115 Seat — Storing settings ........................ Memory function in the rear passenger compartment Operating rear seats ............................ Operating the front passenger seat and rear seats ...................................... Menu (on-board computer) Head-up Display .................................. Overview .............................................. Mercedes me app Information .......................................... Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment ........ Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center ................................................. Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection ........................... Concierge Service ............................... Information .......................................... Making a call via the overhead con‐ trol panel ............................................. Transferred data .................................. 115 116 117 279 276 307 306 305 305 304 304 304 306 Mercedes me connect Accident and breakdown manage‐ ment .................................................... Information .......................................... Transferred data .................................. Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes ................................................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐ tem ........................................................... Automatic emergency call ................... Information .......................................... Information on data transfer ................ Manual emergency call ........................ Overview .............................................. Mercedes-Benz Link see Smartphone integration® Message (multifunction display) see Display message Message memory .................................... Mirrors see Exterior mirrors Mobile phone Wireless charging ................................ 303 302 304 168 309 310 309 312 311 310 408 140 494 Index Wireless charging (rear passenger compartment) ...................................... 140 Mobile phone see Smartphone integration® see Telephone Model series see Vehicle identification plate MOExtended tires ................................... 338 Multifunction camera ROAD SURFACE SCAN ........................ 239 Multifunction display Overview of the displays ...................... 278 Multifunction steering wheel Overview of buttons ............................. 276 Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel Multimedia system Activating/deactivating DSR ................ 215 Collision detection (parked vehicle) ..... 200 Extending/retracting the running boards ................................................... 75 Multimedia system see Display (multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant (multi‐ media system) see MBUX multimedia system see Touchpad N Navigation Notes .................................................. Overview ............................................. Showing/hiding the menu ................... Switching on ....................................... Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route Neutral Inserting .............................................. Notes ........................................................ Optimized acceleration ........................ Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....... O Occupant safety see Airbag 292 294 293 293 186 172 172 171 see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff see Automatic measures after an accident see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt Off-road Assist Setting ................................................. 243 Off-road driving ........................................ 176 Off-road driving see Off-road driving Off-road ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Switching on/off ................................. 205 Oil see Engine oil Index 495 On-board computer ................................. 276 Displaying the service due date ........... 321 Head-up Display menu ........................ 279 Multifunction display ........................... 278 Operating ............................................. 276 Overview of menus .............................. 276 On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection Online services Data storage .......................................... 33 Open-source software .............................. 34 Opening the tailgate using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 78 Operating fluids Additives (fuel) .................................... 396 Brake fluid ........................................... 398 Coolant (engine) .................................. 398 Engine oil ............................................ 396 Fuel (gasoline) ..................................... 395 Notes ................................................... 394 Refrigerant (air conditioning system) ... 400 Windshield washer fluid ...................... 399 Operating safety 48 V on-board electrical system ............ 25 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components) ............................. 27 EQ boost ............................................... 25 Information ............................................ 25 Operating system see On-board computer Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ................................. 23 Operator's Manual (digital) ...................... 20 Optimized acceleration ........................... 172 Activating ............................................. 172 Overhead control panel Overview ................................................ 12 P Paint code ................................................ 392 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .......... 331 Panel heating Setting .................................................. 111 Panic alarm ................................................ 68 Activating/deactivating ......................... 68 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel see Sliding sunroof Park position Inserting .............................................. Selecting automatically ....................... Parking see Electric parking brake Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .................. Activating ............................................ Adjusting warning tones ...................... Function .............................................. Side impact protection ........................ Switching off ....................................... System limitations ............................... Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist Parking brake see Electric parking brake Parking for an extended period ............. Parking lights ........................................... 186 186 244 248 249 244 247 248 244 200 143 496 Index Parking position Exterior mirrors ................................... Storing the position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear ......................................... PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Payload Calculation example ............................ Determining the maximum .................. Perfume see Perfume atomizer Perfume atomizer .................................... Inserting/removing the flacon ............. Setting ................................................. Perfume vial see Perfume atomizer Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... Standby mode function ....................... Permitted towing methods ..................... 156 157 365 364 163 163 163 201 200 349 Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 66 Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 334 Post-collision brake ................................... 51 Power closing function Door ...................................................... 73 Power supply Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 168 Power washer (care) ............................... 330 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ................................................. 49 Function ................................................ 49 PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 49 Reversing measures .............................. 50 PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side ........................... 50 Activation .............................................. 37 Function ................................................ 50 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection plus) ................................ 50 Function ................................................ 50 Reversing measures .............................. 50 Preventative occupant protection sys‐ tem see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) Profile ....................................................... 287 Creating a new profile ......................... 288 Notes ................................................... 287 Selecting profile options ..................... 288 Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Protecting the environment Notes ..................................................... 22 Protection against collision ................... 260 Pulling away see Notes Q QR code Rescue card ........................................... 31 Qualified specialist workshop ................. 28 Index 497 R Radar and ultrasonic sensors Damage ............................................... Radio Overview of the functions and sym‐ bols ...................................................... Rain-closing feature Sliding sunroof ...................................... Raising the vehicle Rear of the vehicle .............................. Reading light Switching on/off with hand move‐ ments .................................................. Reading light see Interior lighting Real wood (Care) ..................................... Rear climate control Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ...... Rear doors (child safety lock) .................. Rear fog lamp Switching on/off ................................. 201 315 88 235 286 334 161 64 144 Rear of the vehicle Lowering ............................................. 235 Raising ................................................ 235 Rear passenger compartment seat Seats ..................................................... 98 Rear seat see Seat see Third row of seats Rear view camera .................................... 249 Care .................................................... 332 Function .............................................. 249 Opening the camera cover (360° Camera) .............................................. 255 Rear window Changing the wiper blade .................... 154 Rear window heater ................................ 159 Rear window wipers Activating/deactivating ....................... 150 Reflective safety vest ............................. 336 Refrigerant (air conditioning system) Notes .................................................. 400 Refrigerator box Using ................................................... 137 Refueling Refueling the vehicle ............................ 191 Remote Online Charging the starter battery ................ 170 Cooling or heating the vehicle inte‐ rior ....................................................... 170 Starting the vehicle .............................. 171 Reporting safety defects .......................... 30 Rescue card ............................................... 31 Reserve Fuel ..................................................... 396 Residual heat ........................................... 162 Rear operating unit .............................. 163 Restraint system ....................................... 36 Basic instructions for children ............... 51 Function in an accident ......................... 37 Functionality .......................................... 36 Malfunction ........................................... 37 Protection .............................................. 36 Reduced protection ............................... 36 Self-test ................................................. 36 Warning lamp ........................................ 36 498 Index Reverse gear Inserting .............................................. 186 Rims (Care) .............................................. 332 ROAD SURFACE SCAN Multifunction camera .......................... 239 ROAD SURFACE SCAN see Camera Roadside Assistance (breakdown) ........... 24 Roll away protection see HOLD function Roller sunblind .......................................... 89 Panorama roof with power tilt/slid‐ ing panel ................................................ 84 Side windows (electric) ......................... 89 Rollover crash ............................................ 29 Roof load .................................................. 403 Roof load display Information .......................................... 183 Roof luggage rack Loading ................................................ 133 Securing .............................................. 133 Route ........................................................ 296 Calculating .......................................... 296 Selecting options ................................ 296 Route guidance with augmented real‐ ity Activating ............................................ 296 Displaying street names and house numbers .............................................. 296 Route-based speed adaptation Function .............................................. 221 Setting ................................................. 222 Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tires ................................ 338 Running boards .......................................... 74 Care .................................................... 332 Extending/retracting ............................. 75 Function ................................................. 74 S Safety systems see Driving safety system Satellite radio Logging in ............................................ 319 Setting music and sport alerts ............. 319 Search light Switching on/off with hand move‐ ments .................................................. 286 Seat ..................................................... 94, 124 4-way lumbar support ........................... 98 Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 94 Adjusting a reclining rear seat ............... 98 Adjusting the front passenger seat from the rear passenger compart‐ ment ...................................................... 97 Automatic seat adjustment .................. 107 Configuring the settings ...................... 107 Correct driver's seat position ................ 94 Folding back the backrest on the third row of seats ................................. 127 Folding the backrest (rear passenger compartment) back ..................... 100, 125 Folding the backrest (rear passenger compartment) forwards to get in (third row of seats) .............................. 100 Folding the backrest (rear) forwards .... 124 Folding the backrest on the third row of seats forwards ................................. 126 Massage program overview ................. 108 Index 499 Mechanically unlocking the backrest (rear passenger compartment) ............ 100 Operating the memory function ........... 115 Panel heating ....................................... 111 Rear (seat comfort) ............................... 98 Resetting the settings .......................... 109 Setting options ...................................... 14 Setting the fully reclined position .......... 99 Workout program overview .................. 108 Seat see Front passenger seat Seat (rear passenger compartment) ....... 16 Setting options ...................................... 16 Seat belt ..................................................... 38 Protection .............................................. 38 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating ......................... 41 Function ................................................. 41 Seat belt warning see Seat belts Seat belts ................................................... 41 Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment ............................................ 41 Adjusting the height ............................... 41 Care .................................................... 334 Fastening ............................................... 41 Reduced protection ............................... 39 Releasing ............................................... 41 Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 41 Warning lamp ......................................... 41 Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 334 Seat heating Activating/deactivating ....................... 109 Seat ventilation Activating/deactivating ........................ 111 Seats Rear passenger compartment (adjusting electrically) ........................... 98 Selecting a gear see Changing gears Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever Self-test Automatic front passenger front air‐ bag shutoff ............................................ 47 Sensors (Care) ......................................... 332 Service center see Qualified specialist workshop Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS Setting a speed see Cruise control Setting the map scale see Map Shift paddles see Steering wheel paddle shifters Shifting gears Gearshift recommendation .................. 188 Side airbag ................................................. 42 Side impact protection ............................ 247 Side windows ............................................. 81 Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment ....................... 65 Closing .................................................. 81 Closing using the SmartKey ................... 83 Convenience closing feature ................. 83 Convenience opening ............................ 83 Opening ................................................. 81 Opening with the SmartKey ................... 83 500 Index Problem ................................................. 84 Roller sunblind (electric) ........................ 89 Size designation (tires) ........................... 370 Sliding sunroof .......................................... 84 Automatic features ................................ 88 Closing .................................................. 84 Closing using the SmartKey ................... 83 Opening ................................................. 84 Opening with the SmartKey ................... 83 Problem ................................................. 88 Rain-closing feature ............................... 88 SmartKey .................................................... 67 Acoustic locking verification signal ....... 68 Battery .................................................. 69 Energy consumption .............................. 68 Features ................................................ 67 Key ring attachment .............................. 69 Mechanical key ...................................... 69 Overview ................................................ 67 Panic alarm ........................................... 68 Problem ................................................. 70 Unlocking setting .................................. 68 SmartKey functions Deactivating .......................................... 68 Smartphone see Smartphone integration® see Telephone Smartphone integration® ....................... 309 Overview ............................................. 309 Snow chains ............................................. 357 Socket (12 V) ............................................ 135 Front center console ........................... 135 Socket (115 V) .......................................... 136 Rear passenger compartment ............. 136 Software update System updates ................................... 290 Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 49 Wheels and tires .................................. 356 Sound menu Functions overview .............................. 320 Spare wheel see Collapsible spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel Special seat belt retractor ........................ 56 Specialist workshop .................................. 28 Speed index (tires) .................................. 370 Sport Utility Vehicle .................................. 29 Standby mode Activating/deactivating ....................... 201 Function .............................................. 200 Standing lights ........................................ 143 Start-off assist see Optimized acceleration Start/Stop button Parking the vehicle .............................. 194 Starting the vehicle ............................. 169 Switching on the power supply or ignition ................................................ 168 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starter battery Charging (Remote Online) .................... 170 Starting assistance see Jump-start connection Starting the engine see Vehicle Starting-off aid see Hill start assist Index 501 STEER CONTROL Function/notes ................................... Steering wheel ......................................... Adjusting (electrically) .......................... Adjusting (manually) ............................ Buttons ................................................ Steering wheel heater .......................... Steering wheel heater Switching on/off .................................. Steering wheel paddle shifters .............. Step see Running boards Storage areas see Storage compartment Storage compartment ............................. Armrest ............................................... Center console .................................... Door .................................................... Glove box ............................................. Storage compartments see Storage compartment Storage spaces USB ports ............................................ 207 276 113 112 276 113 113 187 122 122 122 122 122 122 Stowage areas see Loading Stowage compartment Folding table ........................................ Handset (rear passenger compart‐ ment) ................................................... Rear seat backrest .............................. Stowage compartments see Loading Suggestions Configuring .......................................... Sulfur content ......................................... Surround lighting Switching on/off ................................. Surround View see 360° Camera Surround view camera Care .................................................... Suspension Individual wheel control (E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL) ................................. Rocking free mode (E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL) ........................................... 122 123 123 288 395 148 332 240 239 Setting the suspension level (AIR‐ MATIC) ................................................. Setting the suspension level (EACTIVE BODY CONTROL) ..................... Suspension see AIRMATIC see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Suspension level (AIRMATIC) Setting ................................................. Suspension level (E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL) Setting ................................................. Switch-off delay time Exterior ................................................ Interior ................................................. Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ timedia system) ................................... Switching on/off (control panel) ......... System settings Overview of the system settings menu ................................................... 231 240 231 240 147 149 162 162 289 502 Index T Table see Folding table Tailgate ....................................................... 75 Closing ................................................... 76 Emergency release ................................ 80 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 78 Limiting the opening angle .................... 80 Opening ................................................. 75 Opening dimensions ............................ 401 Unlocking (mechanical key) ................... 80 Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 332 Tank content Fuel ..................................................... 396 Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 396 Technical data Axle load (trailer operation) ................. 406 Information .......................................... 390 Notes (trailer hitch) ............................. 406 Tongue weight ..................................... 406 Towing capacity (trailer operation) ...... 406 Vehicle identification plate .................. 392 Telephone ......................................... 299, 301 Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐ key) ..................................................... 302 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing) .................................... 302 Functions in the telephone menu ........ 302 Notes .................................................. 299 Operating modes ................................. 301 Telephone menu overview ................... 301 Wireless charging (mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment) ....... 140 Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 140 Telephony operating modes Bluetooth® Telephony .......................... 301 Temperature ............................................ 159 Temperature grade .................................. 367 Themes Fastening ............................................. 288 Third row of seats ................................... 126 Folding back the backrest on the third row of seats ................................. 127 Folding the backrest on the third row of seats forwards ................................. 126 Getting in/out ..................................... 100 Through-loading feature see Seat see Third row of seats TIN (Tire Identification Number) ............ Tire and Loading Information placard ... Tire characteristics ................................. Tire inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit Tire information table ............................. Tire labeling ............................................. Characteristics .................................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. Load index ........................................... Load-bearing capacity ......................... Maximum tire load .............................. Maximum tire pressure ....................... Overview ............................................. Speed rating ........................................ Temperature grade .............................. Tire Quality Grading ............................. Tire size designation ............................ Traction grade ..................................... Tread wear grade ................................. 368 363 370 363 367 370 368 370 370 369 369 367 370 367 367 370 367 367 Index 503 Tire load (maximum) ............................... 369 Tire pressure ................................... 359, 360 Checking (manually) ............................ 360 Checking (tire pressure monitoring system) ............................................... 362 Maximum ............................................ 369 Notes ................................................... 357 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system ........................................... 362 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 360 Tire pressure table .............................. 359 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 339 Tire pressure monitor Function .............................................. 360 Restarting ............................................ 362 Tire pressure monitoring system Checking the tire pressure .................. 362 Checking the tire temperature ............ 362 Tire pressure table .................................. 359 Tire Quality Grading ................................ 367 Tire temperature Checking (tire pressure monitoring system) ............................................... 362 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. Tire tread ................................................. Tire-change tool kit Overview ............................................. TIREFIT kit ................................................ Storage location .................................. Using ................................................... Tires Changing hub caps .............................. Characteristics .................................... Checking ............................................. Checking the tire pressure (man‐ ually) ................................................... Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐ sure monitoring system) ...................... Definitions ........................................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. Flat tire ................................................ Installing .............................................. Load index ........................................... Load-bearing capacity ......................... Maximum tire load .............................. 360 356 378 339 339 339 379 370 356 360 362 372 368 338 383 370 370 369 Maximum tire pressure ....................... 369 MOExtended tires ................................ 338 Noise ................................................... 356 Notes on installing ............................... 375 Overview of tire labeling ...................... 367 Removing ............................................ 382 Replacing ..................................... 375, 379 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system ........................................... 362 Rotating ............................................... 378 Selection ............................................. 375 Snow chains ........................................ 357 Speed rating ........................................ 370 Storing ................................................. 378 Temperature grade .............................. 367 Tire and Loading Information placard ............................................................. 363 Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 357 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 360 Tire pressure table .............................. 359 Tire Quality Grading ............................. 367 Tire size designation ............................ 370 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 339 Traction grade ..................................... 367 Tread wear grade ................................. 367 504 Index Unusual handling characteristics ........ 356 Toll system Windshield ........................................... 158 Tongue weight ......................................... 406 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether .................................................. 60 Touch Control On-board computer ............................. 276 Operating ............................................ 283 Touchpad .................................................. 283 Operating ............................................ 283 Touchscreen (media display) Operating ............................................ 283 Tow-away alarm Activating/deactivating ......................... 92 Function ................................................ 91 Tow-bar system ....................................... 273 Tow-starting ............................................. 353 Towing a trailer Notes .................................................. 269 Towing away ............................................ 350 Towing eye Installing .............................................. Storage location .................................. Towing methods ...................................... Traction grade .......................................... Traffic information Switching on the display ...................... Traffic Sign Assist ................................... Function/notes ................................... Setting ................................................. System limitations ............................... Trailer hitch Attaching the ball neck ........................ Care .................................................... Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ......... Trailer operation Active Blind Spot Assist ....................... Active Lane Keeping Assist .................. Attaching the ball neck ........................ Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ......... Trailer stabilization Function/notes ................................... 353 352 349 367 298 262 262 264 262 271 332 272 266 267 271 272 206 Trailer tow hitch Axle load ............................................. General notes ...................................... Notes .................................................. Tongue weight ..................................... Towing capacity ................................... Transfer case HIGH RANGE ....................................... LOW RANGE ........................................ Shifting ................................................ Transmission position display ................ Transporting Vehicle ................................................. Tread wear grade ..................................... Trim element (Care) ................................ Trunk lid see Tailgate TuneIn ....................................................... Calling up ............................................. Turn signal indicator ............................... Turn signal light Activating/deactivating ....................... 406 406 269 406 406 189 189 190 185 351 367 334 318 318 144 144 Index 505 Two-way radios Frequencies ......................................... 391 Notes on installation ........................... 390 Transmission output (maximum) .......... 391 U Unlocking setting ...................................... 68 Updates Important system updates .................. 290 USB port Rear passenger compartment ............. 137 V Vehicle ...................................................... 169 Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 201 Collision detection (parking) ................ 200 Correct use ........................................... 28 Data acquisition ..................................... 31 Data storage .......................................... 31 Diagnostics connection ......................... 27 Equipment ............................................. 23 Limited Warranty ................................... 31 Locking (automatically) ......................... 72 Locking (from inside) ............................. 71 Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 71 Locking/unlocking (emergency key) ...... 73 Lowering ............................................. 384 Maintenance .......................................... 24 Medical aids .......................................... 29 Parking for an extended period ........... 200 Problem notification .............................. 29 QR code rescue card ............................. 31 Qualified specialist workshop ................ 28 Raising ................................................ 380 Standby mode function ....................... 200 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 169 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 171 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 169 Switching off (start/stop button) ......... 194 Towing ................................................. 273 Unlocking (from inside) .......................... 71 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 71 Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 83 Vehicle data Angle of approach/departure ............. 403 Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ............ 184 Fording depth ...................................... 403 Maximum gradient-climbing capabil‐ ity ........................................................ 403 Roof load ............................................. 403 Turning circle ....................................... 401 Vehicle height ...................................... 401 Vehicle length ...................................... 401 Vehicle width ....................................... 401 Wheelbase ........................................... 401 Vehicle data storage Event data recorders ............................. 33 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect ........................................... 33 Vehicle dimensions ................................. 401 Vehicle electronics Notes .................................................. 390 Two-way radios .................................... 390 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .................... 392 Paint code ........................................... 392 VIN ...................................................... 392 Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 170 506 Index Vehicle key see SmartKey Vehicle level Setting individual wheel control ........... 243 Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada ................... 24 Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 339 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 339 Towing eye .......................................... 352 Vehicle with a high center of gravity ....... 29 Ventilating Convenience opening ............................ 83 Ventilation see Climate control Vents see Air vents VIN ............................................................ 392 Identification plate .............................. 392 Seat ..................................................... 392 Windshield ........................................... 392 Vision Removing condensation from the windows .............................................. Windshield heater ................................ Voice Control System Function .............................................. Starting ............................................... W Warning lamps see Warning/indicator lamps Warning system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle Removing ............................................ Setting up ............................................ Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp ...................... J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only) ...................................... $ Brake warning lamp (USA only) .. ÿ Coolant warning lamp ................ 162 164 284 285 336 337 470 468 468 464 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only) ..................... F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only) .......................... Ù Electric power steering warn‐ ing lamp (red) ...................................... # Electrical malfunction warning lamp .................................................... ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp .. å ESP® OFF warning lamp ............. ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes ........ ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up ...... 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes ................................................. 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up .............................................. 6 Restraint system warning lamp .. 7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes .. 7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up ........................................................ 467 467 463 465 465 471 471 471 466 466 462 462 463 Index 507 ä Suspension warning lamp (red) ............................................................. ä Suspension warning lamp (yel‐ low) ..................................................... ! The electric parking brake (yel‐ low) indicator lamp .............................. h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem warning lamp flashes .................... h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem warning lamp lights up ................. L Warning lamp for distance warning function ................................. 469 469 467 472 473 469 Warning/indicator lamps ....................... 460 Overview ............................................. 460 PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................. 47 Warranty ..................................................... 31 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washing by hand (care) .......................... 331 Water tank see Air-water duct Weather information ............................... Web browser Overview ............................................. Wheel change Lowering the vehicle ........................... Mounting a new wheel ........................ Removing a wheel ............................... Removing/installing hub caps ............. Wheel rotation ......................................... Wheels Care .................................................... Changing hub caps .............................. Checking ............................................. Checking the tire pressure (man‐ ually) ................................................... Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐ sure monitoring system) ...................... Definitions ........................................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. Flat tire ................................................ Installing .............................................. Load index ........................................... Load-bearing capacity ......................... 298 308 384 383 382 379 378 332 379 356 360 362 372 368 338 383 370 370 Maximum tire load .............................. 369 Maximum tire pressure ....................... 369 MOExtended tires ................................ 338 Noise ................................................... 356 Notes on installing ............................... 375 Overview of tire labeling ...................... 367 Removing ............................................ 382 Replacing ..................................... 375, 379 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system ........................................... 362 Rotating ............................................... 378 Selection ............................................. 375 Snow chains ........................................ 357 Speed rating ........................................ 370 Storing ................................................. 378 Temperature grade .............................. 367 Tire and Loading Information placard ............................................................. 363 Tire characteristics .............................. 370 Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 357 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 360 Tire pressure table .............................. 359 Tire Quality Grading ............................. 367 Tire size designation ............................ 370 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 339 508 Index Traction grade ..................................... 367 Tread wear grade ................................. 367 Unusual handling characteristics ........ 356 Wi-Fi Setting ................................................. 291 Window curtain airbag ............................. 42 Windows see Side windows Windows (Care) ....................................... 332 Windshield ................................ 151, 153, 159 Defrosting ............................................ 159 Infrared reflective ................................ 158 Radio waves ........................................ 158 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 151 Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL) ............................... 153 Windshield see Windshield Windshield heater ................................... 164 Windshield heating see Windshield heater Windshield washer fluid ......................... 399 Notes .................................................. 399 Windshield washer system Topping up ........................................... 327 Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating ....................... 150 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 151 Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL) ............................... 153 Winter operation Snow chains ........................................ 357 Wiper blades Care .................................................... 332 Replacing ............................................. 151 Replacing (MAGIC VISION CONTROL) ............................................................. 153 Wireless charging Function/notes ................................... 139 Mobile phone ....................................... 140 Mobile phone (rear passenger com‐ partment) ............................................ 140 Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity ...................... 27 Workout program Overview ............................................. 108 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop